1. society
2. work
3. contracts

PROJECT MANUAL
CWA Project No. 2011-04
PROJECT NAME:
HVAC UPGRADES FOR
EAST PINSON VALLEY REC. CENTER
PROJECT ADDRESS
3000 JEFFERSON STATE PARKWAY
BIRMINGHAM, AL 35215
DEPARTMENT OF
PLANNING, ENGINEERING AND PERMITS
CITY OF BIRMINGHAM
ANDRE V. BITTAS
DIRECTOR
ALAN TERRY OGLESBY, NCARB
CITY ARCHITECT
DATE: March 21, 2012
SET NO.______
OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS AND DISCLAIMER
The Project Manual, Technical Specifications, Drawings, and all other documents relating to this
project have been prepared for this individual and particular project, and for the exclusive use of the
original Owner, developer or other party so indicated.
Actual project conditions and as-built conditions may vary significantly. Changes made during
bidding, negotiations, construction, due to additions or deletions of portions of this project, and/or for
other reasons, may not be indicated in these documents.
These documents may not be used or relied upon as a certification of information indicated, or used
for any other project, by any third parties or other parties, for any purpose whatsoever, without the
prior written consent of Charles Williams & Associates, Inc., or prior to receipt of mutually agreed to
compensation paid to Charles Williams & Associates, Inc., therefor.
The ownership, copyrights, and all other rights to these documents, are reserved by Charles Williams
& Associates, Inc., including in part, all copies thereof in any form or media. Reproduction of the
material contained in these documents or substantial quotation of their provisions without prior written
permission of Charles Williams & Associates, Inc., violates the copyright and common laws of the
United States and will subject the violator to legal prosecution.
Charles Williams & Associates, Inc.
3601 8th Avenue South
Birmingham, AL 35222
EAST PINSON VALLEY RECREATION CENTER
HVAC UPGRADES
CWA PROJECT NO. 2011-04
INDEX
SECTION 00003-1
DIVISION PRELIMINARY - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
00003 – INDEX
00010 – INVITATION TO BID
00100 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
00110 - AFFIDAVIT FOR CONTRACTOR FORM
00120 – AFFIDAVIT FOR SUBCONTRACTOR
00130 - AFFIDAVIT OF DIRECT SUBCONTRACTOR TO BE GIVEN TO CONTRACTOR
00200 – PROPOSAL FORM
00400 – CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY PROGRAM
00500 – PROJECT FORMS
00620 – ADVERSTISEMENT FOR COMPLETION
00630 – TAX EXEMPTION
00631 – AGENCY AGREEMENT w/THE GUIDELINES FOR
THE SALES TAX SAVING PROGRAM
00632 – SPECIAL PURCHASE ORDER
00633 – INVOICE TRANSMITTAL
00634 – ESTIMATE
00635 – CONTINUATION SHEET
00636 – ESTIMATED PAYMENT SCHEDULE
00638 – PARTIAL RELEASE OF LIEN
00639 – WAIVER OF LIEN
00640 – PROJECT SIGN
00700 – GENERAL CONDITIONS
00800 – SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01005 – PROJECT SAFETY
01010 – SUMMARY OF WORK
01020 – ALLOWANCES
01200 – PROJECT MEETINGS
01300 – SUBMITTALS
01500 – TEMPORARY FACILITIES
01562 – DUST CONTROL
01600 – MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
01700 – PROJECT CLOSEOUT
01710 – CLEANING
DIVISION 15 –MECHANICAL
232113 SF - HYDRONIC PIPING
233113 SF - METAL DUCTS
233116 FL - NONMETAL DUCTS
233300 SF - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
230517 SF - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 SF - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230533 SF - HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
230553 SF - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230593 SF - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 SF - DUCT INSULATION
230719 SF - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230900 SF - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
231123 SF - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
END OF SECTION
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and form a part of this Section.
1.01
INTENT
A.
This section is included in the Bid Documents to give information required to properly
prepare the Bids and are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents.
1.02
SCOPE
A.
The Contractor shall submit a LUMP SUM BASE BID proposal which shall include all costs
for the HVAC UPGRADES FOR: EAST PINSON VALLEY RECREATION CENTER
for the City of Birmingham located at 3000 JEFFERSON STATE PARKWAY.
BIRMINGHAM, AL 35215 and all systems, services and structures as required for this
project as provided in the construction documents.
B.
It is the intent of these documents to require the contractor to include in his bid all costs
involved for the coordination of all trades to the successful completion of this project as
specifically outlined, required, or reasonably implied.
C.
A PRE-BID CONFERENCE will be held on as indicated in the INVITATION TO BID.
1.03
PROPOSAL
A.
All bids submitted shall be prepared in conformity with and shall be based upon and
submitted, subject to all requirements of the Specifications and Drawings.
B.
Bid Documents shall be enclosed in an envelope which shall be sealed and clearly labeled
"Sealed Bid" and the name of the project so as to guard against opening prior to the time set
therefore. The bidder shall be responsible for the placement of his firm's name, name of
the job and Contractor's license number on the outside of the envelope. A current copy
of the General Contractor’s license and City of Birmingham business license shall be
attached to the Form of Proposal. Submit bids in duplicate.
C.
The Owner may consider as informal any bid on which there is an alteration or departure from
the form of proposal hereto attached.
D.
Under the Alabama State Code, Section 39-2-4 as amended by Act 97-225, it is required for
any contract exceeding $50,000.00 that the bidder submit with his bid a cashier's check drawn
on a local bank, or a bid bond executed by a surety company duly authorized and qualified to
make such bonds in the State of Alabama, payable to the City of Birmingham in an amount
(subject to a maximum of $10,000.00) equal to five percent (5%) of the bid. In order for a
bid to be considered, it must be accompanied by an acceptable bid bond or check.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100-2
E.
The successful Bidder shall be required to execute a Performance and Labor and Material
Bond covering and including labor and materials in an amount equal to 100% of the contract
price.
1.04
BID PROCEDURE
A.
The Owner reserves the right to waive informalities and/or technicalities, to reject any or all
bids without explanation to bidders, and to make award as best interest to Owner appears.
If the bid proposal contains bid alternates, the low bid will be determined by the base bid and
the inclusion of the sum total of all bid alternates selected by the City. The City reserves the
right to select any individual or combination of bid alternates regardless of the order in which
they are listed in the bid proposal form and based on the best interest of the City. In order to
enable the City to properly evaluate bids, each alternate should be bid. In the event a bid is
not provided for any alternate selected by the City for inclusion in the project, then that bid
shall be considered non-responsive. In the event a bid is not received on any alternate which
the City chooses not to include in the project, then the total of the base bid and selected
alternates shall be considered a responsive bid.
If no change in the base bid is required for any alternate, enter "NO CHANGE."
B.
Bids received prior to time of opening will be securely kept unopened. The person whose
duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived and no bids received
thereafter will be considered.
C.
Bidders are cautioned to allow ample time for transmittal by mail or otherwise.
D.
Bids may be withdrawn or modified on written or telegraphic request dispatched by the bidder
in time for delivery in normal course of business prior to time fixed for opening, provided that
telegraphic withdrawal is confirmed in writing over the signature of the Bidder within 48
hours thereafter.
Negligence on the part of the Bidder in preparing the bid confers no right for withdrawal of
the bid after it has been opened. If the low bidder discovers a mistake in its bid rendering a
price substantially out of proportion to that of other bidders, the low bidder may seek
withdrawal of its bid without forfeiture upon written notice to the Owner within three (3)
working days after the opening of bids whether or not award has been made. If the low
bidder offers clear and convincing documentary evidence as soon as possible, but no later than
three (3) working days after the opening of bids, that it made such a mistake due to
calculation or clerical error, an inadvertent omission, or a typographical error, the Owner shall
permit withdrawal without forfeiture. The decision of the Owner shall be made within ten
(10) days after receipt of the low bidder's evidence. In no event shall a mistake of law,
judgment or opinion constitute a valid ground for withdrawal of a bid without forfeiture.
Upon withdrawal of a bid without forfeiture, the low bidder shall be prohibited from:
(1) doing any work on the contract, either as a subcontractor or in any other capacity, and
(2) bidding on the same project if it is re-advertised for letting.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100-3
E.
Erasures or other changes in the bids must be explained or noted over the signature of the
Bidder.
F.
In event of disagreement between bid prices and proposal forms submitted, as between words
and figures, words shall govern.
G.
No bidder may withdraw his bid for sixty (60) days after scheduled time and date set for
opening thereof.
H.
All cashier's checks or bid bonds will be returned immediately to all except the three lowest
bona fide Bidders. Bid bonds shall be returned to the three (3) lowest bona fide Bidders when
the Contract is signed and bonds furnished by the successful Bidder.
I.
The contract shall be awarded to the lowest responsible and responsive bidder, unless the
Owner finds that all the bids are unreasonable or that it is not in the interest of the Owner to
accept any of the bids. A responsible bidder is one who, among other qualities determined
necessary for performance, is competent, experienced, and financially able to perform the
contract. A responsive bidder is one who submits a bid that complies with the terms and
conditions of the Invitation for Bids. Minor irregularities in the bid shall not defeat
responsiveness.
J.
After bids are opened, the three (3) lowest responsive bidders will be required to furnish a
through written breakdown of their bids for validation. The breakdown shall be complete
enough to indicate that all major materials, labor, bonds and permits, overhead and profit,
taxes, insurance, allowance, etc. have been included as part of the bid. The Owner reserves
the right to consider as non-responsive the bid of any bidder failing to deliver this written
breakdown within seven (7) calendar days after the bids are opened, or of any Bidder failing
to provide written clarification or additional detail to the written breakdown within three (3)
calendar days of the receipt of such request.
1.05
EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND SITE
A.
Each bidder submitting a proposal for this Work shall examine the documents and the
premises to satisfy himself as to the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to
operate in performing his part of the work and that will in any manner affect the work under
this contract. All proposals shall take into consideration all such conditions as may affect the
work under this contract. By submitting a bid, the bidder "affirms" that he has visited the site
of the work and understands the Contract Documents.
B.
In the event of discovery of discrepancies between the dimensions shown in the drawings and
those actually existing, the contractor shall report these to the Architect at least 5 days prior
to the Bid. The Architect will check and if clarification is needed, clarification will be made
by Addendum. In the event discrepancies between drawings and actual dimensions are not
clarified, "it will be deemed that the Bid was prepared on the basis of the most expensive way
of doing the work involved."
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100-4
C.
Each bidder submitting a proposal shall examine the documents and site to satisfy himself that
all of the work contained in the documents complies with the Americans with Disabilities Act.
1.06
EXPLANATION AND INTERPRETATIONS
A.
Should any omission, discrepancy, ambiguity, or area in the Drawings and Specifications, or
in any of the Contract Documents be discovered, or should there be any doubt as to the
meaning or intent thereof, report such findings to the Architect in writing. Questions should
be received by the Architect at least five (5) days prior to the date set for receiving of bids.
The Architect will check discrepancy and if clarification is needed, clarification will be issued
by Addendum. In the event the omission, discrepancy or ambiguity is not clarified, "it will be
deemed that the Bid was prepared on the basis of the most expensive way of doing the work
involved."
B.
Clarification will be made by Addendum, which will be sent to all prospective Bidders on
record, or if time does not permit, will be announced at the place prior to the time bids are to
be opened.
C.
Neither the Owner nor the Architect will be responsible for verbal answers regarding the
intent or meaning of any of the contract documents.
1.07
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
To obtain approval to use unspecified products, Bidders shall submit written request at least
ten (10) days before the bid date and hour. Requests received after this time will not be
considered. Requests shall clearly describe the product for which approval is asked, including
all data necessary to demonstrate acceptability. If the product is acceptable, the Architect will
approve it in an Addendum issued to all prime bidders on record.
1.08
TIME FOR COMPLETION
A.
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner
that the date of beginning and the time for completion of the work to be done hereunder are
essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood that the Work
embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be specified in the "Notice to
Proceed" and shall be completed on or before the date set forth in the “Notice to Proceed”.
B.
The Contractor agrees that said work shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and
uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure full completion thereof within the time
specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the contractor and the
Owner that the time for the completion of work described herein is a reasonable time for
completion of same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and usual industrial
conditions prevailing in this locality.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100-5
C.
Delays occasioned by strike occurring on the job during the performance of the work, riots,
civil commotions and change orders agreed upon by the Owner and the Contractor shall be
the only exceptions for which a request for extension may be made. Any claim that the work
has been delayed by any such strike, riot, or civil commotion shall be made in writing to the
Owner no more than ten (10) days after the delay begins; otherwise, such claim shall be
waived, and the work shall be completed without extension for such delay. Time is of the
essence of this contract.
D.
Time for completion of this contract shall be Ninety (90) calendar days from the Notice to
Proceed as adjusted per Supplemental General Conditions, Section 00800, Paragraph 3.10.5.
1.09
USE OF FOREIGN MATERIALS
A.
In accordance with Act Number 97-225, Bill Number H-275 enacted by the 1997 Legislature
of Alabama, the Contractor shall use in the execution of the contract materials, supplies, and
products manufactured, mined, processed, or otherwise produced in the United States or its
territories, if same are available at reasonable and competitive prices.
B.
In the event the contractor breaches the agreement to use domestic products, and domestic
products are not used, there shall be a downward adjustment in the contract price equal to any
realized savings or benefits to the contractor.
C.
The contractor shall use steel produced within the United States when specifications in the
construction contract require the use of steel. If the Owner decides that the procurement of
the above mentioned domestic steel products becomes impractical as a result of a national
emergency, national strike, or other cause, the Owner shall waive the above restriction.
D.
In the event the contractor violates the domestic steel requirements, and domestic steel is not
used, there shall be a downward adjustment in the contract price equal to any savings or
benefits to the contractor.
1.10
FIRE PRECAUTION
A.
Emergency fire protection shall be provided, using extinguishers, said equipment to the
requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters' and relevant Insurance Company.
Particular care shall be exercised when using open flame and welding and cutting equipment;
use only flame-proof type tarpaulins. Keep site clean and orderly with proper protection of
combustibles while in use and in storage.
1.11
ADVERTISEMENT OF COMPLETION
A.
Contractors performing contracts of fifty thousand dollars ($50,000.00) or more shall
immediately after the completion of the contract, give notice of the completion by an
advertisement in a news paper of general circulation published within the City or County in
which the work was done, once a week for four (4) consecutive weeks.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100-6
B.
In no case will a final settlement be made upon the contract until the expiration of thirty (30)
days after the completion of the notice.
C.
Proof of publication of this notice shall be submitted by the General Contractor to the
Architect by affidavit of the publisher and a printed copy of the notice published. If no
newspaper is published in the county, the notice must be posted at the Courthouse for thirty
(30) days and proof shall be made by the Judge of Probate, Sheriff, and the Contractor.
D.
Contractors performing contracts of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000.00) shall
immediately after completion of the contract, give notice of the completion by an
advertisement in a newspaper of general circulation published within the City or County in
which the work was done for one week. The contractor shall furnish the Architect by
affidavit of the publisher a printed copy of the notice published for posting on their bulletin
board for one week. The contractor shall certify under oath that all bills have been paid in
full. Final settlement with the contractor will be made after the notice has been posted for one
entire week.
1.12
GUARANTEES AND BONDS
A.
Contractor shall submit to Architect before final acceptance and final payment all warranties,
guarantees, lien waivers, and surety bonds. All such documents shall show the name and
location of the project and the name of the Owner.
1.13
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
Prior to beginning any work on this project, a meeting shall be held with the Architect to
review the requirements as they relate to the work schedule, method of approach, and bring
attention to all specific job requirements.
1.14
PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURE
A.
The Contractor shall protect the existing property from damage caused by his work or
workman, and be responsible for the repair of any damage thus caused.
1.15
TEMPORARY FACILITIES PROVIDED BY THE CONTRACTOR
A.
The Contractor shall provide all temporary facilities.
1.16
SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS
A.
Full compliance is required to the Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Standards, "Safety
and Health Regulations for Construction," as published in the Federal Register, Volume 36,
Number 75, dated Saturday, April 17, 1971, as may be applicable to this project, or any later
revision.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100-7
1.17
COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
All work shall be accomplished in accordance with applicable sections of all Local, County,
State and Federal Law, Codes or Ordinances and the Americans with Disabilities Act.
Contractor shall be responsible for all fees, permits, impact fees, licenses, etc.
1.18
EQUAL OPPORTUNITY
A.
The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows:
1.
The Contractor and all subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or
applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin or age. The
Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that
employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex,
national origin or age. Such action shall include but not be limited to the following:
employment upgrading, demotion or transfers, recruitment or recruitment advertising, layoff
or termination, rate of pay or other forms of compensation, and selection for training,
including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to
employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of nondiscrimination.
2.
The Contractor and all subcontractors shall, in all solicitation or advertisement for
employees placed by them or on their behalf state that all qualified applicants will receive
consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, national origin or
age.
3.
MINORITY BUSINESS PARTICIPATION IN CITY PROJECTS. BE IT
ORDAINED by the City Council of the City of Birmingham, Alabama as follows: The
City of Birmingham shall include written language in all Request for Proposals (RFP’s)
and Contracts encouraging minority and women owned business participation. As a
matter of public policy, the City of Birmingham agrees to make opportunities available
to the maximum extent possible, to actively include Historically Underutilized Business
Enterprises (HUBE’s) such as architectural firms, engineering firms, investment
banking firms, other professional consultant services providers, and construction
contractors as part of business, economic and community revitalization programs.
1.19
BIRMINGHAM PLAN-CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY PROGRAM
A.
Contractors bidding on public works construction projects of the city of Birmingham shall
comply with the program guidelines set forth in the Birmingham Plan - Construction Industry
Program - Instructions to Bidders Section 00400.
1.20
DECLARATION OF U.S. CITIZENSHIP AND/OR LAWFUL PRESENCE OF AN
ALIEN
A.
In accordance with the “Beeson-Hammon Alabama Taxpayer and Citizen Protection Act”,
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SECTION 00100-8*
Act Number 2011-535 (Code of Alabama (1975) §31-13-9), enacted by the 2011 Legislature
of Alabama, the Contractor shall be required to properly complete and submit with the signed
contract an Affidavit attesting that the Contractor shall not knowingly employ, hire for
employment, or continue to employ an unauthorized alien. The form of Affidavit shall be as
provided by the City of Birmingham and as included in the Project Manual, and once executed
shall become part of the Contract Documents.
B.
As part of this Affidavit, the Contractor shall attest it has registered with and is participating
and will participate during the performance of the Contract in the Federal work authorization
program known as “E-verify” operated by the United States Citizenship and Immigration
Service Bureau of the United States Department of Homeland Security to verify information
of newly hired employees, pursuant to the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986
(IRCA), P.L. 99-603, in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Alabama
Immigration Act..
C.
The Contractor shall also secure from any subcontractor(s) employed or contracted in
connection with physical performance of services pursuant to the Contract with the City of
Birmingham verification of compliance with Code of Alabama (1975) §31-13-9 in a form
substantially similar to the Affidavit included in the Declaration, and the Contractor shall
maintain records of such compliance and provide a copy of such verification to the City of
Birmingham at the time the subcontractor is retained to perform such services.
END OF SECTION
AFFIDAVIT FOR BUSINESS ENTITY/EMPLOYER /CONTRACTOR
STATE OF ALABAMA
)
COUNTY OF JEFFERSON )
Before me, a notary public, personally appeared ________________________________ (print
name) who, being duly sworn, says as follows:
As a condition for the award of any contract, grant, or incentive by the City of Birmingham,
Alabama, to a business entity or employer that employs one or more employees, I hereby attest
that in my capacity as ___________________________________ (your position) for
___________________________________________________
(name
of
business
entity/employer/contractor) that said business entity/employer/contractor shall not knowingly
employ, hire for employment, or continue to employ an unauthorized alien.
I further attest that said business entity/employer/contractor is enrolled in the E-Verify program.
(ATTACH
DOCUMENTATION
ESTABLISHING
THAT
BUSINESS
ENTITY/EMPLOYER/CONTRACTOR IS ENROLLED IN THE E-VERIFY PROGRAM)
___________________________________________
Signature of Affiant
Sworn to and subscribed before me this _____day of _________________________, 201__.
I certify that the affiant is known (or made known) to me to be the identical party he or she
claims to be.
_________________________________________
Signature and Seal of Notary Public
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
AFFIDAVIT FOR SUBCONTRACTOR
STATE OF ALABAMA
)
COUNTY OF JEFFERSON )
Before me, a notary public, personally appeared ___________________________________
(print name) who, being duly sworn, says as follows:
As a condition for being a subcontractor on a project paid for by contract, grant, or incentive by
the State of Alabama, any political subdivision thereof, or any state-funded entity, I hereby attest
that in my capacity as ____________________________________ (your position) for
______________________________ (subcontractor name), said subcontractor shall not
knowingly employ, hire for employment, or continue to employ an unauthorized alien.
I further attest that said subcontractor is enrolled in the E-Verify program prior to performing
any work on the project. (ATTACH DOCUMENTATION ESTABLISHING THAT
SUBCONTRACTOR IS ENROLLED IN THE E-VERIFY PROGRAM)
____________________________________________
Signature of Affiant
Sworn and subscribed before me this _____day of ___________________________, 201____.
I certify that the affiant is known (or made known) to me to be the identical party he or she
claims to be.
_________________________________________________
Signature and Seal of Notary Public
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
AFFIDAVIT OF DIRECT SUBCONTRACTOR TO BE GIVEN TO CONTRACTOR
STATE OF ALABAMA
)
COUNTY OF JEFFERSON )
Before me, a notary public, personally appeared _________________________________ (print
name) who, being duly sworn, says as follows:
I hereby attest that as ___________________________________________(your position) for
the direct subcontractor _________________________________________(name of business
entity/employer/subcontractor) for _____________________________________________
(name of business entity/employer/contractor) said direct subcontractor has not knowingly
employed, hired for employment, or continued to employ an unauthorized alien. I further attest
that I have verified each of the above-named direct subcontractor’s employee’s eligibility for
employment. I further attest that I have in good faith complied with Code of Alabama, Section
31-13-9 (c)*
____________________________________________________________
Signature of Affiant
Sworn to and subscribed before me this ____day of _______________________, 201___.
I certify that the affiant is known (or made known) to me to be the identical party he or she
claims to be.
__________________________________________________
Signature and Seal of Notary Public
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
FORM OF PROPOSAL
TO:
SECTION 00200-1
City of Birmingham
Department of Planning, Engineering and Permits
City Hall, Suite 410
710 North 20th Street
Birmingham, Alabama 35203
ATTN: CITY ARCHITECT
1.
The undersigned contractor (herein “Contractor”) having carefully examined the Contract
Documents, the site of the work, and the conditions affecting the work, hereby proposes and
agrees, if this proposal is accepted, to enter into Contract, furnish bonds in the forms specified
and to furnish supervision, labor, equipment and materials required for the HVAC
UPGRADES FOR: EAST PINSON VALLEY RECREATION CENTER for the City of
Birmingham (“the City”), located at 3000 JEFFERSON STATE PARKWAY,
BIRMINGHAM, AL 35215 (“the Project”).
2.
The Contractor agrees to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents as
distributed by the Department of Planning, Engineering and Permits of the City of
Birmingham, Alabama, and dated (insert date of Contract Documents) for the sum of
($
)
___________________________
DOLLARS (the “Contract Sum”).
In addition, if unit prices are requested for all or any part of the Project, Contractor proposes
and agrees to perform all quantities of work necessary for the successful completion of the
Project in accordance with the unit prices bid by Contractor on the attached Unit Price Form.
(If unit price bids desired, generate Unit Price Form for the Project and attach to this
Form of Proposal)
If no change in the base bid is required for any Alternate, enter “No Change”.
3.
The Contractor further agrees to submit a complete breakdown of all labor, equipment and
material to be used in the Project, including those estimated by the subcontractors, showing at
a minimum all labor cost and material cost at the divisional level and following the format of
the Contractor’s pay request. The requirement must be met before any funds will be released
to the Contractor by the City.
4.
TIME FOR COMPLETION of this project shall be Ninety (90) calendar days from the
date of Notice to Proceed as may be adjusted per the Contract.
5.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES will be assessed in favor of the City for failure to achieve
substantial completion within the allotted time. See General Conditions, Article 49 for a
schedule of Liquidated Damages.
6.
In submitting this bid, Contractor understands that the City reserves the right to reject all bids
FORM OF PROPOSAL
SECTION 00200-2*
and that this bid may not be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days from the opening
thereof.
7.
Contractor further agrees that at the time the City delivers to the Contractor a Contract for
execution, the undersigned Contractor will within ten (10) days after date of such delivery,
execute and deliver to the City Architect the signed Contract, the required bonds and proof
of insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents.
8.
Contractor further agrees that if it fails to execute the Contract and present the required
Contract bonds and proofs of insurance within fifteen (15) calendar days after being given
written notice of award of this Contract, the City may retain from the Contractor’s bid
guaranty (if it is a cashier’s check) or from the surety (if the guaranty is a bid bond), the
difference between the amount of the Contract as awarded and the amount of the proposal of
the next lowest bidder or the amount of the guaranty, whichever is lesser. If no other bids are
received, the full amount of the guaranty may be retained or recovered as liquidated damages
for such default. Any sums so retained or recovered shall be the property of the City.
9.
In submitting this bid, the Contractor certifies that there has been no collusion with any
person in respect to this bid or any other bid or the submitting of bids for the Contract for
which this bid is submitted.
10.
The Contractor hereby certifies that in employment of personnel it does not discriminate
against any person or persons, on account of race, creed, color, sex, or national origin. The
Bidder represents that it has read, understands, and will comply with Instructions to Bidders
regarding the Birmingham Plan-Construction Industry Program.
(If an addendum(a) is (are) issued, this Form of Proposal must be reissued also, adding
the following provisions:
11.
The receipt of the following addenda is acknowledged:
ADDENDUM NO. 1 DATED
ADDENDUM NO. 2 DATED
ADDENDUM NO. 3 DATED
ADDENDUM NO. 4 DATED ____________________
And so on, as appropriate, based on the number of addenda
BY:
COMPANY:
ADDRESS:
TITLE:
FORM OF PROPOSAL
SECTION 00200-3*
MAILING ADDRESS:
TELEPHONE:
If Bidder Is a Corporation, State:
•
Name of officer Certified by Board of Directors to execute Contract Binding
Bidder:
•
State of Incorporation of Bidder:
If Bidder is a Partnership, State:
• Full Names of All Partners:
For any bid of $50,000 or more, the bidder MUST attach a photocopy or other evidence of
current General Contractor’s License No., current bid limit and type(s) of work for which the
Contractor is currently licensed.
DATE:
END OF FORM OF PROPOSAL
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REGARDING THE
BIRMINGHAM PLAN-CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY PROGRAM
SECTION 00400-1
ALL BIDDERS ON CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS SHOULD READ CAREFULLY
The City of Birmingham has adopted the program guidelines set forth in the Birmingham PlanConstruction Industry Program ("BP-CIP"), which is a Minority Business Enterprise
Program/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Program (MBE/DBE) designated to encourage the
participation of MBE/DBEs in construction projects of the City. The program is administered by the
Construction Industry Authority ("CIA"). Under this program, it is the policy of the City to encourage
the use of MBE/DBEs in construction projects. Special attention is called to steps seven and eight
below, which will be a part of any successful Bidder's contract with the City.
Under the new MBE/DBE Program, the contractors bidding on construction projects of the
City should comply with the following program guidelines:
(1)
The potential Bidders should acquire specifications and drawings to decide whether to
make a bid.
(2)
The potential Bidders should contact the CIA for assistance in obtaining MBE/DBE
participation in the bid process and contract award. The CIA has established a listing
of certified MBE/DBEs, by trade categories, for assistance to general contractors
interested in bidding on the projects.
(3)
The potential Bidders should identify those trades and activities for which it will solicit
and accept bids from potential subcontractors. Then the potential Bidders should
notify the CIA of those trades and construction activities which will be subcontracted
to other firms. The notification will allow the CIA an opportunity to apprise certified
MBE/DBEs of bid opportunities.
(4)
The CIA will identify and notify certified MBE/DBEs of the various bid opportunities
on each project.
(5)
The CIA will assist interested MBE/DBEs in bid preparation and those MBE/DBEs
will submit bids to potential Bidders.
(6)
In the cases of a dispute between a MBE/DBE and a potential general contractor with
respect to bid placement, the CIA Executive Director shall be allowed to confidentially
view the general contractor's bid analysis work and spread sheets, with the
concurrence of the general contractor.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS REGARDING THE
BIRMINGHAM PLAN-CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY PROGRAM
SECTION 00400-2*
(7)
Within 45 days after receiving a notice to proceed, the general contractor must
provide the CIA Executive Director a list of MBE/DBE Subcontractors to whom it
has or anticipates awarding subcontracts, along with a description of the scope of
work to be performed by each such MBE/DBE subcontractor and the estimated dollar
amount for each MBE/DBE firm listed. This step shall be a part of any successful
bidder's contract with the City. All bidders should be aware that the CIA establishes
goals for MBE/DBE participation. While the precise goal for each phase of the City
construction projects may vary from phase and year to year, the minimum goal to be
used for City projects is 20 percent MBE/DBE participation.
(8)
After the job closeout and before the general contractor receives the final payment or
Retainage, the general contractor shall submit to the CIA the names of MBE/DBE
subcontractors used on the job, along with the scope of work and net dollar amount
paid to each subcontractor. This step shall be a part of any successful bidder's contract
with the City.
Additional information about this Program may be obtained from the Executive Director,
Construction Industry Authority at 3600 4th Avenue South, Birmingham, Alabama 35222, (205)
324-6202.
A Pre-bid Conference will be held as outlined in Instructions to Bidders 00100.
It shall continue to be the policy of the City not to discriminate against anyone because of race.
However, affirmative action to correct the identified vestiges of racial discrimination and segregation
is an integral part of this policy of nondiscrimination.
END OF SECTION
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
_________
MBE/DBE
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
______________
SCOPE
OF WORK
INSTRUCTIONS:
* For project start-up, complete item A only (after notice to proceed)
* For project with less than 45- day duration, complete items A, B and C
* For project with 45 day duration or longer reporting, complete items A & B
* For project close-out, complete item C only
$____________________
FINAL
AMOUNT
PAID
(Include Change Orders)
$____________________
$____________________
$____________________
$____________________
$____________________
$____________________
_______________%
_______________%
_______________%
_______________%
_______________%
_______________%
_______________%
% OF TOTAL
CONTRACT AMOUNT
FINAL COMPLETION DATE: _________________
FINAL TOTAL CONTRACT AMT:$________________________________
(Include Change Orders)
C. PROJECT CLOSE-OUT REPORT
REVISED SUBMISSION DATE:____________
$______________
$______________
$______________
$______________
$______________
$______________
TENTATIVE
CONTRACT
AMOUNT
TOTAL MBE/DBE $______________________
INITIAL SUBMISSION DATE:______________
DATE SUBMITTED: ______________________
A._____________________________________
B._____________________________________
C._____________________________________
D._____________________________________
E._____________________________________
F._____________________________________
LIST EACH MBE/DBE SUBCONTRACTOR
B. 45-DAY REPORT
3. SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE: _______________
2. SCHEDULED START DATE: ____________ ACTUAL START DATE: ____________
(Notice to Proceed)
1. TOTAL CONTRACT AMOUNT: $___________________________________________
A. START-UP DATA
NAME OF PROJECT:_________________________________________________________________________PROJECT NO:______________________________________
PROJECT OWNER:_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
GENERAL CONTRACTOR:_________________________________________ADDRESS_________________________________________PHONE____________________
GENERAL CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT-SPECIFIC REPORT
MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION
3600 4th AVENUE SOUTH, BIRMINGHAM, AL 35222/Telephone: (205) 324-6202/Fax: 324-6210
BIRMINGHAM CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY AUTHORITY
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
PROJECT FORMS
SECTION 00500-1*
1.00
GENERAL
A.
The following documents, prepared by the American Institute of Architects shall apply to and
form a part of the Contract Documents for this project.
AIA A101
Contract Agreement for Construction
AIA A201
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
AIA A310
Bid Bond
AIA A312
Performance Bond and Payment Bond
AIA G701
Change Order
AIA G703
Continuation Sheet for G702
AIA G704
Certificate of Substantial Completion
AIA G706
Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims
AIA G706A Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens
AIA G707
Consent of Surety of Final Payment
B.
Copies of the printed AIA Documents, are on file and may be referred to at the office of the
Architectural Division of the Department of Planning and Engineering (Room 410, City Hall)
during normal working hours: 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday through Friday.
C.
Copies of the printed AIA Documents, may be purchased from the office of the Birmingham
Chapter of the American Institute of Architects, 107 South 21 Street, Birmingham, Alabama
or from the American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue, NW, Washington,
D.C. 20006.
END OF SECTION
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
FORM OF ADVERTISEMENT OF COMPLETION
SECTION 00620-1*
LEGAL NOTICE
IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 39-1 AS AMENDED BY H275 CODE OF ALABAMA,
1997, NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN THAT
CONTRACTOR(S) HAVE COMPLETED
FOR THE CITY OF BIRMINGHAM
AND HAVE MADE REQUEST FOR FINAL SETTLEMENT OF SAID CONTRACT
CONTRACTOR
BUSINESS ADDRESS
END OF SECTION
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
TAX EXEMPTION INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 00630-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
GENERAL: PLEASE NOTE - BID 10% ON ALL MATERIALS.
A.
The City of Birmingham uses the following procedure to take advantage of its exemption
from sales and use taxes in construction contracts.
B.
At the time bids are submitted, the Contractor should include sales taxes in their bid for
all anticipated material purchases, as well as in stock material. It will be the responsibility
of the General Contractors to inform their subcontractors of this requirement prior to
receiving their bid.
C.
The following Sections (00631-00635) are included as part of the tax exemption package.
TAX EXEMPTION INSTRUCTIONS
AGENCY AGREEMENT BETWEEN CITY AND CONTRACTOR
SPECIAL PURCHASE ORDER
INVOICE TRANSMITTAL
PAY ESTIMATE
AIA FORM G702
Exhibit B (Guidelines for the Sales Tax Savings Program)
1.01
QUANTITATIVE ESTIMATES
A.
Successful Bidder must submit a complete breakdown of MATERIALS to be used in the
project, including those estimated by the subcontractor. The breakdown should estimate
material quantity and cost at the divisional level and follow the format as provided on the
General Contractor's pay request. This requirement must be met before any funds will be
released to the General Contractor.
1.02
MATERIAL RESPONSIBILITY
A.
The storage, installation and correct quantities of materials for the project remain the
responsibility of the Contractor under this agreement. The City only assumes the
responsibility of paying for materials as required and ordered by the Contractor.
1.03
PURCHASE ORDERS
A.
Contractor shall purchase materials and supplies as contractual agent for the City using
Special Purchase Orders provided by the City. This also includes purchases made by all
Subcontractors.
B.
Special Purchase Orders shall be used in numerical sequence as pre-numbered. Return
the unused and voided Special Purchase Orders after all materials are purchased.
TAX EXEMPTION INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 00630-2
C.
Purchase orders shall be issued only for materials used on the project and not for tools or
rental equipment. Use of Special Purchase Orders for projects or jobs other than for this
project constitutes evidence of a breach of contract.
D.
City's original of all Special Purchase Orders issued during the job will be sent with
invoices or as issued.
E.
Distribution of Special Purchase Orders:
(1) Original of Special Purchase Order provided to the City of Birmingham’s
Construction Accountant.
(2) Copy of Special Purchase Order retained by the General Contractor.
(3) Copy of Special Purchase Order given to the Vendor.
(4) Copy of Special Purchase Order issued to the Subcontractor.
F.
After receiving the Notice to Proceed, it is the General's Contractor's responsibility to
send a representative of his or her company to the City's Finance Department to sign for
the release of Special Orders. Under no circumstances will Special Purchase Orders be
mailed to a General Contractor.
G.
If retainage is authorized to be released, it is the General Contractor's responsibility to
return all unused and voided Special Purchase Orders to the City of Birmingham Finance
Department. The City's Finance Department cannot release retainage funds until it
receives and verifies all voided and unused Special Purchase Orders from the General
Contractor.
H.
It is the General Contractor's responsibility to obtain a release of liens from each vendor
concerning Special Purchase Orders originally issued to vendors for materials never
purchased. In completing its release of liens, the vendor should specify the name of
project and the Special Purchase Order(s) assigned to it by the General Contractor or
Subcontractor.
1.04
INVOICES
A.
Invoices shall be billed to the City in care of the Contractor with no sales tax charged.
Example: Sold To:
City of Birmingham
Project Name
c/o Contractor's Name
Contractor's Address
Subcontractor’s name (if applicable)
Invoices with City of Birmingham written in will not be accepted for payment. All
original material invoices must be billed properly from suppliers. The City's purchase
order number should be listed on each invoice. All material invoices used on a project
must be submitted to the City within seven calendar days after the close of the cutoff date
of completed work.
TAX EXEMPTION INSTRUCTIONS
SECTION 00630-3
B.
All invoices submitted for payment shall be accompanied by and listed on an approved
Invoice Transmittal Form, along with the original Special Purchase Order. Submit all
documents to the City of Birmingham Finance Department, Room GA-100, Attention:
Construction Accountant, Birmingham, Alabama 35203.
C.
Invoice Transmittal Forms must be numbered consecutively.
D.
Checks will be mailed directly to Vendors.
E.
The City will deduct discounts submitted by the Contractor but any disallowed discount
will be charged back to the Contractor.
F.
In the event purchases are made by the General Contractor or any subcontractor without
using the Special Purchase Orders, the City will consider reimbursement for such
purchases only after receipt of an invoice evidencing such purchase and a receipt
evidencing payment of such purchase, accompanied by written explanation of why such
purchase was made without using the Special Purchase Orders supplied. In no event will
the City reimburse for taxes paid on such purchases. The City reserves the right to
disallow reimbursement for such purchases at its sole discretion.
1.05
MONTHLY ESTIMATES
Estimate shall be submitted to Project Architect, as outlined in the Supplemental General
Conditions 00800, who will forward same to the City Architect.
1.06
FINAL PAYMENT
Under no circumstances shall the General Contractor be paid retainage (which is the 5% of
the first 50% of the contract price) until all subcontractors and all materials have been paid
in full. (Architectural Requirement) Before a general contractor receives a final
payment, all provisions of the Code of Alabama Public Works Act must be complied with.
END OF SECTION
Revised: August 29, 2004
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
AGENCY AGREEMENT
AGREEMENT BETWEEN________________________________(hereinafter called the
"Contractor") and the City of Birmingham, Alabama, a municipal corporation (hereinafter called
"City").
RECITALS
1.
Contractor and City entered a contract dated________________ for the performance work
described therein, a copy of said contract is attached hereto as Exhibit A (hereinafter called
the "Contract").
2.
Contractor and City also desire to enter into an agreement whereby certain purchases under
the Contract can be made through City as a means of taking advantage of the City's status of
being exempt from sales and use taxes.
AGREEMENT
1.
City hereby appoints Contractor as its AGENT for the City to purchase for and in the name of
City, all equipment, materials, supplies and other items which the contractor requires for
performance of the Contract. The purchase of any materials, supplies, or other items which
are not required for the performance of the Contract are expressly made outside the authority
granted hereunder. Purchases made under this agreement shall not be commingled with
other jobs or projects, either those of the City or otherwise.
2.
City will be responsible for the payment of all authorized purchases made hereunder.
General contractor and subcontractors agree to follow the “Guidelines for the Sales Tax
Savings Program” cited in Exhibit B to this agreement and all provisions of the Tax
Exemption Instructions section of the Instructions to Bidders heretofore provided. The City
reserves the right to amend, alter, supplement or waive any provision of these Guidelines
and/or Instructions as it may deem necessary to protect the interests of the City. The City
will notify the Contractor in advance, in writing, of any such changes or amendments.
3.
Contractor will execute orders, or purchase orders on forms prescribed by the City, with each
such order or purchase order showing that it is executed by and through the Contractor as an
Agent for the City. Vendors will render statements for materials purchased to Contractor as
agent for City. After reviewing and approving the invoices, Contractor will immediately
forward these invoices to the City for payment. If the Contractor disputes any invoice charge
or amount, the invoice will be submitted to the City with a statement by the Contractor that
the invoice is disputed with an explanation in writing of why the invoice is disputed. The City
may withhold payment of all or any part of any disputed invoice pending resolution of the
dispute. Use of Special Purchase Orders issued for this project for the purchase of materials
to be used on projects other than this project is unauthorized and will constitute evidence of
a breach of contract for which the City reserves the right to terminate this agreement and the
underlying contract for construction.
4.
The amount due Contractor under the Contract shall be reduced by the sum of all amounts
paid by the City for materials, supplies or other authorized items purchased hereunder, plus
any savings of sales and use tax on the purchase of such items. In the event that the
Contractor pays for materials that should have been purchased and/or paid for by the City
under this Agreement, then said amount due as Contract sum shall also be reduced by the
amount of sales tax that was due and/or paid.
Contractor shall maintain separate accounting records of all material purchases for the
5.
Project under the authority granted to it as agent. Such records shall be open to City during
normal business hours of Contractor for a period of two (2) years after completion of the
project.
6. The authority granted to Contractor hereunder may be revoked by City at any time upon
written notice delivered to Contractor at his offices located at _________________________
during normal business hours.
7. Unless specifically authorized by the City of Birmingham, neither the general contractor nor
any subcontractor has authority or permission from the City to impair, delegate, assign or
transfer the principal/agent purchasing responsibility granted in this “ Agency Agreement.”
8. Contractor shall preserve and protect all City-owned materials ordered hereunder and shall
inspect all such materials before accepting delivery to assure that said materials, supplies
and equipment are specified quality and quantity.
__________________________________________
Contractor
BY _______________________________________
ATTEST:__________________________________
THE CITY OF BIRMINGHAM,
A MUNICIPAL CORPORATION
BY _______________________________________
William Bell, Mayor
ATTEST:
________________________________________
Paula Smith, City Clerk
APPROVED AS TO FORM BY LAW DEPARTMENT:
________________________________________
(Signature)
Revised August 29, 2004
_________________
Date
SPECIAL PURCHASE ORDER
Section 00632-1*
FOR CONSTRUCTION MATERIAL
VENDOR:
PLEASE BILL ALL INVOICES IN THIS MANNER:
CITY OF BIRMINGHAM
GENERAL CONTRACTOR
PURCHASE ORDER NO.
Jrl'l^oTcE™'™"*"™
Non-Departmental
Purchase orders must be filled out completely
NOTICE TO VENDORS1
PURCHASE ORDERS CANNOT BE USED FOR TOOLS
AND RENTAL EQUIPMENT. VENDOR ACCEPTANCE
FOR SUCH ITEMS DOES NOT OBLIGATE PAYMENT
FROM CITY OF BIRMINGHAM. PURCHASE OF ANY
MATERIALS, SUPPLIES OR OTHER ITEMS WHICH ARE
NOT REOUIRED FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF THE
SPECIFIC PROJECT CITED IS EXPRESSLY FORBIDDEN.
MAIL INVOICES TO:
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
INVOICE TRANSHITTAL NO.
DATE
Section 00633-1*
PURCHASE ORDER NO.
CONTRACT NO.
SUB-CONTRACTOR
INVOICE
NO.
VENDOR
INVOICE
AMOUNT
CASH
- DISCOUNT
PAY
VENDOR
TRANSHITTAL TOTALS
PAID BY CITY
TAX
TOTAL THIS TRANSHITTAL
TOTAL BROUGHT FORWARD
TOTAL TO DATE
BY:
APPROVAL -
DATE:
FIN 452 (9-84)
CITY OF BIRMINGHAM
CONSTRUCTION COMPANY
BY:
• DEDUCT
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
SECTION 00634-1*
ESTIMATE NUMBER ______________
PROJECT NAME: ______________________
TOTAL CONTRACT TO DATE $_________________
COMPLETE $ ____________
Stored Materials (See attached list)
$ ____________
TOTAL completed and Stored Materials
$ ____________
Less:
Retainage _____ % of Total completed and Stored Materials
$ (___________)
Less:
Invoices Paid by City of Birmingham under Sales
Tax Agreement through Invoice Transmittal # ____________
Material ____________________________________________
+ Sales Tax $ ______________________
$(___________)
TOTAL
Less:
$ ____________
Previous Payments on Periodical
Estimates for Partial Payments
$(___________)
BALANCE DUE CONTRACTOR this Estimate
$ ___________
As stored materials are incorporated in the finished work, their value shall be deducted from previous Stored
Materials. In case any of the above branches or divisions of the work are not applicable, the Contractor shall delete
these branches and shall add the necessary branches in the spaces provided.
I certify that the above account is correct, just and that payment therefore has not yet been received.
Sworn and subscribed before me
this _________________ day of ___________________
_________________________________
Contractor
______________________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires _________________________
BY: ________________________________
VERIFICATIONS AND APPROVALS
Approved by ______________________________________________
Project Manager
Date _________________________
Approved by ______________________________________________
Architect
Date _________________________
Approved by ______________________________________________
City Architect
Date _________________________
Approved by ______________________________________________
Finance Department
Date________________________
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
B
DESCRIPTION OF WORK
CAUTION: You should u
NO.
A
CONTINUATION SHEET
C
SCHEDULED
FROM PREVIOUS
APPLICATION
(D + E)
E
™™D
WORK COMPLETED
D
MATERIALS
PRESENTLY
STORED
(NOT IN
D OK E)
f
AIA DOCUMENT G703 (Instructions on
G
COMPLETED
AND STORED
TO DATE
(D + E + F)
(G •*•' C)
BALANCE
TO
FINISH
(C - G)
H
RETAIN AGE
(IF V A R I A B L E )
1
SECTION 00635-1*
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
ESTIMATED PAYMENT SCHEDULE
Section - 00636-1*
CITY OF BIRMINGHAM
ROOM 205 CITY HALL
ATTENTION: PAUL WOOLDRIDGE
BIRMINGHAM, AL 35203
(205) 254-2448
CURRENT DATE:
CONTRACT TOTAL: $ .
VENDOR NAME: _
BRIEF PROJECT DESCRIPTION:
ESTIMATED PAYMENT SCHEDULE
DATE
1
AMOUNT
DATE
2
•
>
10
AMOUNT
DATE
AMOUNT
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
2!
22
23
24
P L E A S E ESTIMATE THE AMOUNT T H A T WILL BE BILLED TO THE CITY EACH MONTH FOR LABOR AND 'OR
MATERIALS O V E R THE LIFE OF THE CONTRACT. THIS FORM MUST BE SUBMITTED TO THE ABOVE ADDRESS
BEFORE THE FIRST PAYMENT IS MADE ON THIS CONTRACT. IF YOU HAVE ANY QUESTIONS CALL PAUL
WOOLDRIDGE ((205) 254-2448)
PREPARED B Y : _
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
SECTION - 00638
Partial Release of Lien
Date:
Name of Firm:
Total Contract Amount:
$
Percent of Contract Complete:
%
Value of Contract Complete:
$
Previous Amount Paid:
*$
Amount Due this Application:
$
The undersigned Lien, in consideration of value received, hereby releases its lien and right to
claim a Lien to the extent of $
, or for labor, services, or materials
furnished through
, except
to the following property:
Dated on
, 20
.
Lien
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
SECTION - 00639
Waiver of Lien
Know All By These Presents: that
For and in consideration of
0.00
Dollars and other good and valuable
considerations, lawful money of the United States of America, to me in hand paid, the receipt
whereof is hereby acknowledged, does hereby waive, release, remise and relinquish any and all
right to claim any lien or liens for work done or material furnished or any kind or class of lien
whatsoever on the following described property:
Dated this
day of
20
.
By
Signed, sealed and delivered in the presence of:
NOTARY
at
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00700-1*
1.00
GENERAL CONDITIONS
A.
The A General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,@ AIA Document A201 American
Institute of Architects, 1997 Edition, Article 1 through 14 inclusive, hereinafter referred to as
the General Conditions, are hereby, except as the same may be inconsistent herewith, made a
part of this Specification.
B.
Where any article of the General Conditions is modified, added or deleted herein, the
unaltered provisions of that Article shall remain in effect except for the supplemental
provisions of those Article(s) specifically amended, voided, or superseded.
C.
The General Conditions govern all sections of the specifications and are as binding as if
repeated therein.
D.
Copies of the printed form AIA Document No. A201, are on file and may be referred to at the
office of the Architectural Division of the Department of Planning, Engineering and Permits.
(Room 410, City Hall) during normal working hours: 8:00 a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Monday
through Friday.
E.
Copies of the printed form AIA Document No. A201 may be purchased from the office of
the Birmingham Chapter of the American Institute of Architects, 107 South 21st Street,
Birmingham, Alabama or from the American Institute of Architects, 1735 New York Avenue,
Washington, D.C. 20006.
END OF SECTION 00700
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-1
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the
Contract for Construction," American Institute of Architects Document A201, 1997 Edition. Where
any Article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by
these Supplemental Conditions, the provisions of the Article, paragraph, subparagraph or clause not
specifically altered by these Supplemental Conditions shall remain in full effect.
The General Conditions also may be supplemented elsewhere in the Contract Documents by
provisions located in, but not necessarily limited to, Division 1 of these Specifications.
The following paragraphs have been modified or added:
1.1.8
1.1.9
1.2.1.1
1.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.5.1
3.4.4
3.5.2
3.6.1
3.10.4
3.10.5
3.10.6
3.10.7
3.10.8
3.10.9
3.10.10
3.10.11
3.10.12
3.10.13
3.10.14
4.6
7.3.3.1
7.3.3.3
9.2.1
9.2.1.1
9.3.1
9.3.1.1
9.3.4
9.3.4.1
9.10.6
9.10.7
9.10.8
9.11.1
11.4.1.2
11.4.1.3
11.5.1.1
13.8
13.8.1
9.11.2
13.9
11.1.1
13.9.1
11.1.2
13.10
11.1.2.1
13.10.1
11.1.2.2
13.11
11.1.3.1
13.11.1
11.1.3.2
13.12
11.2.1
13.12.1
11.4.
13.13
11.4.1
13.13.1
ARTICLE 1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
is supplemented as follows:
1.1.8 Where the terms DIRECTED, SELECTED, or APPROVED are used, they shall mean as
directed, selected or approved by the CITY ARCHITECT if deemed necessary.
1.1.9 Equal in quality and money value and similar in design or properties, shall mean in the CITY
ARCHITECT’S opinion.
1.2.1.1 Should the drawings disagree in themselves, or with the Specifications, the quality or greater
quantity of work or material shall be estimated upon, and, unless otherwise authorized by the City
Architect in writing, shall be performed or furnished. Figures given on drawings governing scale
measurements and large scale details governing small scale drawings. Descriptive writings shall take
precedence over code symbols.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-2
1.2.4 Any reference to a publication by its basic designation only shall be a reference to the issue,
edition, and amendment (if any) of that publication current on the date of these Documents to the
extent indicated by the reference thereto.
ARTICLE 2
OWNER
is supplemented as follows:
2.2.5 Delete in its entirety and replace with the following: The City will furnish to the Contractor
up to five (5) sets of Plans and Specifications. Contractor shall be responsible for reproduction costs
for any additional sets that may be required. Contractor will keep one (1) copy of the Drawings and
Specifications on the job for use of any interested parties.
2.2.5.1 The Architect will furnish all supplementary drawings and large scale details as necessary for
clarification of the Work. Two (2) copies of such drawings will be furnished.
ARTICLE 3
CONTRACTOR
is supplemented as follows
The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the City has the right to deduct from the total amount
of consideration to be paid, if any, to the Contractor under this agreement all unpaid, delinquent, or
overdue license fees, taxes, fines, penalties and other amounts due the City from the Contractor.
3.4.4 Not later than fifteen (15) days from the Contract date, the Contractor shall provide a list
showing the name of the manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the products proposed for use
on this project.
3.5.2 The Contractor (and each subcontractor) shall furnish their respective written guarantee or
warranties to and in favor of the Owner guaranteeing their Work to be free from faults and defects for
a period of one (1) year, or for a longer period as may be prescribed by law or any applicable special
guarantees required by the Contract Document, said period or periods of Warranty starting on date
set forth in subparagraph 12.2.2 and as may be further modified.
3.6.1 Contractor shall not be required to pay taxes on equipment, materials and supplies purchased
for and incorporated into the Work as Contractual agent of the City and, the cost of the purchases are
paid directly to the vendor by the City, using Special Purchase Orders provided by the City. However,
the amount of taxes that would otherwise be due shall be included in the space provided on the
Contractor's Pay Estimate, Section 00634 of this project manual. This amount is to be subtracted,
along with the Cost of Materials, paid directly to vendors by the City, each month from the sum
requested.
3.10.4 The following definitions apply to the following Construction Schedule Sections:
1.
2.
3.
As - Planned - The original plan for accomplishing a task or project.
Contractor - The General Contractor who executes this contract.
Critical Path - The schedule logic path with the least total float.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-3
3.10.4 (continued)
4.
Critical Path Method (CPM) - Technique used to develop a project schedule by establishing
relationships between a group of activities to identify the sequencing of work necessary to
complete the project within the contractual time frame.
Delay - An event or situation that prevents the contractor form completing a task or event.
Logic Path - A group of construction activities in a CPM schedule which impact one another
through the establishment of predecessor/successor relationships and possess the same total
float.
Milestone Activities - An activity representing the start or finish or a significant date or
activity, which may or may not impact the overall project completion.
Negative Float - Total float (in days) less than zero indicating that the current projected
completion date is later than the contractual completion date.
NOAA - National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration.
Notice To Proceed - Document that provides written notification by THE CITY to the
General Contractor authorizing him to proceed with the execution of construction on a
specific date. This document also notes the contract duration and completion date.
Predecessor Activity - That activity that comes before another activity in the schedule.
Recovery Schedule - Schedule submitted by the General Contractor outlining his plan to
make up delays to complete the project within the contractual time frame.
Successor Activity - That activity that comes after another activity in the schedule.
THE CITY - The City of Birmingham, a municipal corporation, located in the State of
Alabama, or its authorized representative.
Total Float - The amount of time an activity can be delayed before it affects the project finish
date or an intermediate deadline. Total float can be zero or negative in which case the activity
is critical; or it can be positive in which case the activity is not critical.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
3.10.5 The contractor shall meet with the City’s Project Team (e.g., City Architect, Project
Manager and Scheduling Consultant) to develop an as-planned schedule which graphically
details the Contractor’s plan to construct the project within the contractual time frame. The
Contractor’s representatives attending this meeting should include the Project Manager,
Project Superintendent and major subcontractor(s). The schedule shall be developed in a
Critical Path Method (CPM) format and contain the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Complete sequencing of construction by activity;
Specific activities for each work task within the identified project areas;
Durations (in days) for each activity based upon the time it takes for assigned work crews
to complete the task;
Specific activities noting shop drawing submittal and review periods;
Specific activities noting long lead material procurement and deliveries;
Milestone activities such as the project start, dry in, substantial completion, and final
completion;
A Critical Path identifying the logic path on the schedule with the least total float.
3.10.6 The construction schedule shall identify an initial “Notice to Proceed” milestone activity.
All activities following the N.T.P. milestone shall have successor activities. The last activity in the
schedule will be the substantial completion milestone, which will succeed the final work activity in the
schedule.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-4
3.10.7 Task durations shall be noted in days not to exceed (14) days in length unless otherwise
directed by THE CITY.
3.10.8 THE CITY will computerize the as-planned schedule and distribute a printed copy to the
Contractor for review and concurrence within ten (10) calendar days after the initial schedule
development meeting. Any revisions to the schedule will be noted by the Contractor in writing and
returned to THE CITY within seven (7) calendar days. THE CITY will make revisions to the
schedule in accordance with this section and re-issue for review within seven (7) calendar days. The
final as-planned construction schedule must be signed by THE CITY and the Contractor. The final
approved as-planned schedule will become a target schedule. The target schedule will be distributed
for implementation.
3.10.9 The target schedule will be used to measure the progress of the project.
3.10.10 THE CITY will incorporate the approved project schedule into its Capital Project Scheduling
Database for management and updating.
3.10.11 The construction schedule will be updated on a bi-weekly basis or as directed by THE CITY.
The contractor and any subcontractor whose work will begin, or is continuing before the next
meeting will meet with THE CITY to review and discuss project activity and update the project
schedule. Required update information that will be provided by the Contractor includes:
1. The actual start dates of tasks projected to begin or any other activities starting within the
status period (based on the daily records);
2. The actual finish dates of tasks projected to end or any other activities finishing within the
status period (based on the daily records);
3. Remaining durations of activities in progress during the update period based on the number or
crew days remaining to complete the work;
4. Major modifications in the Contractor’s work plan (schedule logic);
5. Items impacting the start, progress and/or completion of activities within the current or future
update period;
6. All items which may jeopardize the completion of the project within the contractual time
frame.
3.10.12 THE CITY will update the construction schedule based on the acquired information and
distribute the schedule to the meeting participants within five (5) calendar days.
3.10.13 If the projected substantial completion date has negative float, the project is behind schedule.
If the project is behind schedule , and upon written notification by THE CITY, the Contractor shall
submit a recovery schedule to THE CITY identifying adjustments in the Contractor’s work plan and
workforce to complete the project within the contractual time frame. The recovery schedule shall be
submitted in accordance with the standards established in this section. The Contractor shall submit
this recovery schedule within five (5) calendar days after the dated notification. If the Contractor fails
to submit this recovery within the specified time frame, the Contractor shall be in non-compliance
with these contract provisions and all payments will be withheld until the recovery schedule is
submitted and approved by THE CITY. Failure on the part of the Contractor to submit the recovery
schedule within ten (10) calendar days after notification will constitute a contractual default. THE
CITY reserves the right to notify the Contractor’s Bonding Agent of this contractual default.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-5
3.10.14 Upon final approval, the recovery schedule will be incorporated into or supersede the original
target schedule.
ARTICLE 4
ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
is supplemented as follows:
4.6 ARBITRATION: Delete in its entirety, and by so doing, all other references to Arbitration in the
General Conditions. The Owner will not participate in Arbitration. Deleted references to Arbitration
shall include, but not be limited to subparagraphs 4.3.3, 4.3.6, 4.4.1, 4.4.5, 4.4.6, 4.4.8, 8.3.1., 9.7.1,
11.4.9, and 11.4.10.
ARTICLE 7
CHANGES IN THE WORK
is supplemented as follows:
All changes to the Scope of Work, whether additive or deductive, amounting to more than 10% of
the bid amount must be re-bid.
7.3.3.1 and 7.3.3.3: Add the following additional restrictions:
The allowance for overhead and profit combined, include the total cost to the Owner, shall be
based upon the following schedule:
For the Contractor, for any work performed by his own forces 15% of the cost.
For each Subcontractor involved, Work performed by his own forces, 15% of the cost.
For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, 10% of the amount due the
Subcontractor.
Cost shall be limited to the following: Cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of
delivery, cost of labor, including Social Security, Old Age and Unemployment Insurance
(Labor cost may include a pro-rata share of foreman's time, only in the case that an extension
of the Contract Time is granted on account of the change); Workmen's Compensation
Insurance, rental value of power tools and equipment.
Overhead shall include the following: Bond premiums, supervision, superintendence, wage of
timekeepers, watchmen and clerks, small tools, incidents, general office expense and all other
expenses not included in the "Cost."
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-6
If the net value of change results in a credit from the Contractor or Subcontractor the credit
given shall be the net cost without overhead or profit. The cost as used herein shall include all
items of labor, materials, and equipment.
ARTICLE 9
PAYMENT AND COMPLETION
9.2.1 Modify as follows: Schedule of Values shall be submitted on AIA Document G703
Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet.
9.2.2.1 In addition to the Schedule of Values, the contractor shall also submit a Schedule of Labor
and a Schedule of Materials in a form acceptable to the City Architect.
9.3.1 Modify as follows: Application for Payment shall be submitted on City of Birmingham Pay
Estimate Form Section 00634 of this Project Manual and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheet.
9.3.1.1 Modify a follows: Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay the amount due the
Contractor on account of progress payments less retainage of 5% of the first 50% of the contract
amount.
9.3.4 Project Architect will review monthly Pay Request and forward to City within seven (7)
calendar days. Pay Requests not approved by the Project Architect will be returned to the
Contractor for clarifications/revisions and resubmitted. Upon receipt of monthly Pay Request
from the Project Architect , the City shall have thirty (30) calendar days to review and verify
invoices. Incorrect billing will be returned to the Contractor through the Project Architect for
corrections and/or additional information as requested by the City.
When requested revisions are made to the Pay Request, the Contractor shall re-submit it to the
Project Architect for re-submittal to the City.
9.3.4.1 All Applications for Payment, after the first Pay Request, shall be accompanied by a Partial
Lien Waiver Form, provided by the City, signed and attested by all sub-contractors that received
payments on the previous Application for Payment.
9.10.6 At the completion and acceptance of the Work, the Contractor shall, in addition to
countersigned and warranted subcontract guarantees, guarantee all materials and workmanship for a
period of one (1) year from the date of final certificate. In addition, the Contractor shall guarantee the
water-tightness of the building for a period of one (1) year from the final certificate. All guarantees
shall be written to the owner.
9.10.7 Certificate for final payment shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for faulty
materials or workmanship that may develop during the guarantee period. Under no circumstance shall
the General Contractor be paid the 5% of the first 50% of the contract amount as Retainage until all
subcontractors and all materials have been paid in full.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-7
9.10.8 Immediately after completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall give notice of said
completion by an advertisement in some newspaper of general circulation, published within Jefferson
County, Alabama, once a week for a period of four (4) successive weeks. Proof of published of said
notice shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City of Birmingham, in care of the Architect, by
affidavit of the publisher and printed copy of the notice published . In no instance shall a final
settlement be made upon the contract until the expiration of thirty (30) days from the completion of
the notice.
Contractors performing contracts of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), shall immediately
after completion of the contract, give notice of the completion by an advertisement in a newspaper of
general circulation published within the City or County in which the work was done for one (1) week.
The Contractor shall furnish the Architect by affidavit of the publisher a printed copy of the notice
published for posting on their bulletin board for one week. The Contractor will be paid after the
notice has been posted for one entire week.
9.11.1 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: Should the Contractor or, in case of default, the surety fail
to complete the work within the contractual time frame and no extension of contract time is granted
by THE CITY., a deduction for each calendar day that any work shall remain incomplete, an amount
indicated by the Liquidated Damages Schedule provided in this section, shall be deducted from any
monies due to the Contractor. Liquidated damages assessed provided in the specifications is not a
penalty but is intended to compensate THE CITY for increased time in administrating the contract,
supervision, inspection and engineering which required CITY forces for a longer time on any
construction operation or phase than originally contemplated when the contract period was agreed
upon in the contract. Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the work or any part of it after
the contractual completion date will in no way waive THE CITY’S rights under the contract.
In the event the Contractor shall, for any reason, fall behind schedule, he shall promptly put double
shifts of labor on the work and take such other steps as may be required to expedite the work to
ensure that it shall be fully completed within the stated time at no extra cost to the Owner.
Liquidated Damages shall be withheld from payments until the Contractor is no longer behind
schedule.
9.11.2
SCHEDULE OF LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT
MORE THAN
0
$50,000
$100,000
$500,000
$1,000,000
$2,000,000
$5,000,000
$10,000,000
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
UP TO AND INCLUDING
$50,000
$100,000
$500,000
$1,000,000
$2,000,000
$5,000,000
$10,000,000
DAILY CHARGE PER
CALENDAR DAY
$100.00
$200.00
$500.00
$800.00
$1,100.00
$1,500.00
$1,700.00
$2,000.00
Failure to comply with any requirements of this section may constitute a default of the contract.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-8
ARTICLE 11
INSURANCE AND BONDS
11.1.1 In the first line following the word "maintain" insert the words "in a company or companies
acceptable to the Owner and licensed to do business in the State where the Project is located".
11.1.2 Delete in its entirety and insert the following: The Contractor shall maintain such insurance
as will protect himself and the Owner, its employees and the Owner's Architects and Engineers from
direct, assumed and contingent liability, from claims under Workmen's Compensation Acts, and from
any other claims for damages for personal injury including death or damage to property, which
may arise from operations under this Contract, whether such operations be done by himself or by any
person directly or indirectly employed by either of them; whether in consequence of any negligence or
delay in performing or safeguarding the Work, use of defective or unacceptable materials, or any act
or omission by him or his agents whereby any persons or property suffers in jury through his or his
agent's fault. The Contractor and subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of
them shall also maintain Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance against liability arising out of
the ownership, maintenance, or use of all owner, non-owner and hired automobile equipment. In the
event of such injuries or damages, the Contractor and Surety will save the Owner and its
representatives harmless from all suits, actions, or claims thereby arising.
11.1.2.1 The contractor shall, before starting work, furnish to the Owner Certificates for Insurance as
herein specified showing insurance in company acceptable to Owner. The policies of insurance shall
be countersigned by a duly authorized and accredited agent of the carrier and shall contain the
following clause:
"The Owner shall have the right to take coverage upon the failure of the Contractor to provide the
coverage and cost of such insurance shall be deducted from amounts owning to the Contractor".
11.1.2.2 The insurance shall extend to and include all the Contractor’s operations, regardless of
whether they may be in connection with work that is temporary, included in any of the bid items or
classified as Extra Work. The cost of any and such insurance shall be paid for by the Contractor.
Insurance coverage shall not be less than the following:
COVERAGE
1.
2.
Workmen's Compensation and
Employer’s Liability
Comprehensive General Liability
Bodily Injury. This policy shall
provide coverage on an Occurrence Basis,
for injury to persons caused by long exposure
as well as by a instantaneous happening.
The policy shall be extended to include
slander, libel and false arrest.
AMOUNT
$ Statutory
$1,000,000.00
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
3.
Comprehensive General Liability
Property Damage.
SECTION 00800-9
$600,000.00
The policy shall be endorsed to provide
coverage on an Occurrence Basis.
The policy shall be extended to include
explosion, collapse, and damage to
underground utilities.
4.
Comprehensive Automobile Liability
$300,000.00
(per person)
Bodily Injury including Death
$1,000,000.00
(per person)
5.
Comprehensive Automobile Liability
$300,000.00
Property
Damage
6.
Owner's and Contractor's Protective
Policy, Specifically naming the Owner
and Architect/ Engineer as the Insured:
Bodily Injury
$1,000,000.00
Property Damage
$600,000.00
7.
Indemnity: The Contractor shall assume all liability for and shall indemnity and save harmless
Owners, Architect and their employees from all damages and liability for injury to any person
or persons, and injury to or destruction of property, including the loss of use thereof, by
reason of an accident or occurrence arising from operations under the Contract, whether such
operations be by himself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed
by either of them, occurring on or about the premises or the ways and means immediately
adjacent, during the term of the Contract or any extension thereof, and shall also assume the
liability for injury and/or damages to adjacent or neighboring property by reasons of work
done under the Contract. The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph shall not
extend to the liability of Architect, his agent, or employees arising out of:
1)
2)
The preparation or approval of maps, drawings, opinion, reports, surveys, change
orders, designs or specifications, or
The giving or the failure to give directions or instruction by the Architect, his agents
or employees provided such giving of or failure to give is the primary cause of the
injury or damage.
11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be canceled or permit any insurance to lapse.
All insurance policies shall include a clause to the effect that the policy shall not be canceled or
reduced, restricted, or limited until thirty (30) days after the Owner has received written notice as
evidenced by return receipt of registered or certified letter. Certificates of Insurances shall contain
transcripts from the proper office of the insurer, evidencing in particular those insured, the extent of
the insurance, location and the operation to which the insurance applies, the expiration date and the
above mentioned notice of cancellation clause.
11.1.3.2 Certificates called for in this Subsection shall be furnished in duplicate and specifically set
forth evidence of all coverage required by 11.1.1 and 11.1.2 to the Architect and copies of any
endorsement that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-10
11.2.1 Delete in its entirety and replace with the following: OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE:
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner, the Owner’s Consultant
contingent liability for claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. The policy shall
be for the same limits of liability and shall contain the same specific endorsement which the
Contractor places on the insurance required by Article 11, Subparagraph 1.1.1. This insurance shall
conform to the requirements and the restrictions imposed by Article 11. The original policy and one
(1) certified copy of the policy shall be filed with the Owner and the Architect.
11.4 Add the following Paragraph 11.3. before Paragraph 11.3.1 PROPERTY INSURANCE: The
Contractor shall furnish and maintain Property Insurance described as follows: The policy shall be in
the name of the Owner. It shall be for the same limits of liability and shall contain the same specific
endorsements which the Contractor places on the insurance required by Article 11, Subparagraph
11.1.1. This insurance shall conform to the requirements and the restrictions imposed by Article 11.
The original and once certified copy of the policy shall be filed with the Owner and the Architect.
11.4.1 Reference in line 1 to “Owner” shall be changed to “Contractor.” Add the following clause:
The amount of the insurance at all times to be at least equal to the amount paid on account of work
and materials incorporated in the work and plus the value of the work and materials furnished or
delivered but not yet paid for by the Owner. The policies shall be in the names of the Owner and the
Contractor and “All Sub-contractors” as their interest appears, and certificates of the insurance
company as to the amount and type of coverage, terms of the policies, etc., shall be delivered to the
Owner through the Architect before partial payments are made.
When changes in Scope of the work written Change Order or Change Orders aggregate an amount
equal to 15% of the total contract, including the Change Order or Change Orders, the insurance
coverage included under this heading shall be increased accordingly. Proof of coverage shall be
established by endorsement to the original policy or by reissue of the original policy to include the
added coverage, or in accordance with any other acceptable policy of the insuring company for
increasing the coverage.
11.4.1.2
Delete in its entirety.
11.4.1.3 Delete in its entirety with the following: If the property insurance requires minimum
deductibles, the Contractor shall pay the costs not covered because of such deductibles.
11.5.1.1 The Contractor shall provide Performance Bond in the amount of one hundred percent
(100%) of the Contract Price and Labor and Materials Payment Bond in the amount of one hundred
percent (100%) of the Contract price.
ARTICLE 13
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
is supplemented as follows:
13.8
Application for Copyright Prohibited.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 00800-11*
13.8.1 No reports or documents reproduced in whole or in part under this contract shall be the
subject of an application for copyright by or on behalf of the Contractor.
13.9
Discrimination in Employment.
13.9.1 The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee employed in the performance of
this contract or against any applicant for employment in the performance of this contract because of
race, creed, color, or national origin.
13.10
Political Activity Prohibited.
13.10.1 None of the funds, materials, property, or service contributed by the Owner or the Contractor
under this contract shall be used in the performance of this contract for any partisan political activity,
or to further the election or defeat of any candidate for public office.
13.11
Religious Activity Prohibited.
13.11.1 There shall be no religious worship, instruction or proselytization as part of or in connection
with the performance of this Agreement.
13.12
Clean Air Act
13.12.1 The Contractor shall comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued
pursuant to the Clean Air Act of 1970.
13.13
Use of Foreign Materials
13.13.1 In accordance with Act Number 97-225, Bill Number H-275 enacted by the 1997 Legislature
of Alabama, the Contractor shall use in the execution of the contract materials, supplies, and products
manufactured, mined, processed, or otherwise produced in the United States or its territories, if same
are available at reasonable and competitive prices.
In the event the Contractor breaches the agreement to use domestic products, and domestic products
are not used, there shall be a downward adjustment in the contract price equal to any realized savings
or benefits to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall use steel produced within the United States when specifications in the
construction contract require the use of steel. If the Owner decides that the procurement of the above
mentioned domestic steel products becomes impractical as a result of a national emergency, national
strike, or other cause, the Owner shall waive the above restriction.
In the event the Contractor violates the domestic steel requirements, and domestic steel is not used,
there shall be a downward adjustment in the contract price equal to any savings or benefits to the
Contractor.
END OF SECTION
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
SECTION 01005
PROJECT SAFETY
PART GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Enforcement of OSHA regulation.
B.
Reporting of accidents.
C.
Responsibility for safety.
ENFORCEMENT OF OSHA REGULATIONS
A.
All Subcontractors and General Contractors shall adhere to OSHA regulations as
they apply to safety of working conditions, conditions of personnel, and
environmental contaminations.
B.
The General Contractor shall maintain on the project site a copy of OSHA
regulations. Sections pertaining to safety as applied to the construction industry
should be ‘highlighted’.
REPORTING OF ACCIDENTS
A.
Subcontractor shall report any accident or injury in writing to the Contractor,
Owner, and Architect.
B.
Report to identify persons involved, (name, addresses, phone number, title, etc.)
work being performed, extent of injury, witnesses, time and
circumstances of accident.
C.
Injuries requiring hospitalization, medical evaluation report shall be submitted to
Contractor, Owner, and Architect.
D.
Provide copies of claims for Workman’s Compensation insurance to Contractor,
Owner, and Architect.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY - SUBCONTRACTOR
A.
The Subcontractor or Tradesmen are solely responsible for the safety of working
conditions and performance condition of personnel whom he has employed
while present on the project site.
B.
No Subcontractor shall commence work after another trade or proceed with
work if unsafe conditions exist upon his arrival.
PROJECT SAFETY
01005 - 1
C.
1.5
1.6
Drug testing of Subcontractor’s personnel may be requested if persons who are
suspect of being under the influence of drugs or alcohol. Cost of such testing to
be at tested party
RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY - GENERAL CONTRACTOR
A.
The General Contractor is responsible for the safety of his personnel and the
working conditions of the tradesmen he employs.
B.
The General Contractor is responsible for the total site working conditions and
to monitor Subcontractors and other trades in their maintenance of safe working
conditions.
C.
Drug testing of General Contractor’s personnel if requested to be at
RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY - ARCHITECT
A.
The Architectural firm is responsible for the safety of his personnel when
present on the job site.
B.
The Architect is not responsible for any on site working conditions or the
condition of working personnel. Further he will not endeavor to identify safety
violations unless they directly affect his ability to perform his duties under the
Owner/Architect Agreement.
PART 2
A.
PART 3
A.
PRODUCTS
NOT USED
EXECUTION
NOT USED
END OF SECTION 01005
PROJECT SAFETY
01005 - 2
SUMMARY OF WORK
SECTION 01010-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and form a part of this Section.
1.01
EXTENT OF WORK
SCOPE:
General HVAC Upgrades to the identified facility. All work as defined on the
drawings and in the Specifications.
1.02
CONTRACT WORK
A.
The Contract Work shall include all labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete all
work as described in Extent of Work and herein specified.
B.
Drawings and Specifications are complementary; Divisions and Sections are arranged
according to materials and functions and are not intended to be "trade" sections. These
specifications establish construction and material standards as well as techniques and do not
necessarily cover all specific items of materials shown on the drawings.
C.
The contractor shall examine the premises and satisfy himself as to the existing conditions
under which he will be obliged to operate in performing his part of the work under the
contract. No allowance will be made subsequently in this connection in behalf of the
Contractor for any error or negligence on his part.
1.03
SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS
A.
Full compliance is required to the Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Standards, "Safety
and Health Regulations for Construction", as published in the Federal Register, Volume 36,
Number 75, dated Saturday, April 17, 1971, as may be applicable to this, or any later
revisions.
SUMMARY OF WORK
SECTION 01010-2*
1.04
EXAMINATION SURFACES AND/OR CONDITIONS
A.
All Contractors shall examine all surfaces on which, or against which, their work is to be
applied and shall notify the General Contractor and Architect in writing of any defects that
they may discover which, in their opinion, would be detrimental to the proper installation or
operation of their products. Commencing of work by Contractor denotes acceptance by
Contractor of all surfaces and conditions affecting his work.
END OF SECTION
ALLOWANCES
SECTION 01020-1*
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Each Bidder shall include in his proposal allowance as hereinafter specified. The allowance
shall be the Contractor's net delivered price including taxes, but not including any profit,
overhead, insurance, cost of installation, or any other incidental expense. The cost of
installation and other expenses to the Contractor shall be included in the base proposal and
are not a part of any allowance except for the contingency allowance.
B
The Contractor shall purchase the allowed materials as directed by the Architect and, should
the actual cost be more or less than the Allowances, the contract amount shall be adjusted,
accordingly.
C.
The actual cost shall include any applicable trade discounts.
1.01
ALLOWANCES
A.
Contractor shall include in the Base Bid a credit of: $30,000.00 to be used solely at the
discretion of the Owner. Unused allowance money to be credited to the Owner at the end of
the job via change order.
B.
Contrary to other allowances, any costs for unloading, labor, installation, overhead and profit
shall be included in the Contingency Allowance.
C.
In the event any part of the credit remains at time of project closeout, that amount shall be
deducted from final payment.
END OF SECTION
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
PROJECT MEETINGS
SECTION 01200-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and form a part of this Section.
1.01
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
A.
Prior to beginning any Work on this project, a meeting shall be held with the Architect,
Construction Manager, General Contractor, Separate Contractors, and all major
subcontractors. The meeting shall review the requirements as they relate to each party,
outline the Work schedule, and method of approach, and bring attention to all specific job
requirements.
B.
In preparation for this session, the Contractor shall identify long lead items, submittal
packages, delivery dates and time requirements for Work by subcontractors, and prepare a list
of activities which will form the basis for development of the Detailed Construction Schedule.
1.02
JOB COORDINATION MEETINGS
A.
During the course of construction, the Architect, Construction Manager, the Foreman,
General Contractor and all the subcontractors shall hold regular meetings and such other
meeting as requested by the City Architect's representative. These meetings shall be held at
the building site, unless such is not practical, for the purpose of establishing the current status
of the project and to coordinate the various parts of the Work so as to expedite the progress
of the Work.
1.03
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PERIODIC ESTIMATES
A.
The Contractor shall meet with the City’s Project Team (e.g., City Architect, Project Manager
and Scheduling Consultant) to develop an as planned schedule which graphically details the
Contractor’s plan to construct the project within the contractual time frame. The
Contractor’s representatives attending this meeting should include the Project Manger,
Project Superintendent and major subcontractor(s). The schedule shall be developed in a
Critical Path Method (CPM) format as outlined in Supplemental General Conditions Section
00800, Article 3.
PROJECT MEETINGS
SECTION 01200-2*
1.04
ESTIMATE FORM
A.
The Contractor shall furnish, in a form satisfactory to the City Architect, (1) detailed estimate
giving a complete breakdown of the contract price by the various subdivisions of Work
required under the contract documents and two (2) periodic itemized estimates of Work done
for the purpose of making partial payments thereon. The costs employed in making up any of
these schedules will be used only for determining the basis of partial payments and will not be
considered as fixing a basis for additions to or deductions from the contract price.
END OF SECTION
SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01300-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and form a part of this
Section.
1.01
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Shop Drawings and samples shall be properly identified by project name, description or
names of equipment, materials, and items and complete identification of location at
which materials or equipment are to be installed.
1.02
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit Shop Drawings for all items called for in the detail Specifications. Submit a
minimum of five (5) black-line prints of each Drawing, unless otherwise specified in the
detail Specifications. Two (2) prints each Drawing will be retained by the Architect, the
remaining prints will be returned to the Contractor. One (1) print of each Drawing
bearing the final approval stamp of Architect shall be kept at the project office and shall
be maintained in good condition. No Shop Drawing other than those stamped
"APPROVED" shall be on the job for any purpose and any Work installed incorrectly
from any Shop Drawing shall be removed and corrected at no change in contract price.
B.
Approval will be for general design only and will not relieve Contractor from
responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, even though same were not
indicated when approved.
C.
In lieu of Shop Drawing prints, Contractor may at his option, submit one (1) reproducible
transparency and one black-line print of each drawing until final approval is obtained, at
which time five (5) corrected copies shall be submitted.
D.
In checking Shop Drawings, Architect shall not be required to check dimensions,
quantities, electrical characteristics, specific capacities, or coordination with other trades,
these being the responsibility of the Contractor. Contractor shall attest, either in writing
by stamp, or signature, that all Shop Drawings submitted for approval have been checked
for compliance with the Drawings and Specifications prior to submission to the Architect;
otherwise they will be returned unchecked.
SUBMITTALS
SECTION 01300-2*
E.
Approval of Shop Drawings, shall be for general design only and will not relieve
Contractor from responsibility for errors and omissions. Approvals shall not be
construed as approved departure from Contract Drawings and Specifications.
F.
No Shop Drawings shall be submitted directly to the Architect from a manufacturer,
jobber, or subcontractor. All submittals shall be through the General Contractor.
1.03
SAMPLES
A.
Furnish all samples called for in the detail Specifications and such other samples as the
Architect may direct.
B.
Samples for color selection shall include a complete selection of available colors and
finishes. After Architect has selected colors and finishes, submit four (4) additional
samples of the selected colors and finishes which will become a master color guide to be
used throughout the progress of the Work.
1.04
SUBMISSION
A.
Submission of Shop Drawings and samples shall be by a transmittal letter, in duplicate,
containing project name, Contractor's name, subcontractor's and/or vendor's name, a
complete listing of Drawings and samples.
B.
Samples of the selection of color and finishes shall be made in one submittal. No color
selections will be made until samples on all items requiring the color selection have been
submitted.
END OF SECTION
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
SECTION 01500-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and form a part of this
Section.
1.01
TEMPORARY OFFICES AND SHEDS
A.
The Contractor shall provide his office, storage sheds and other structures as may be
necessary to carry on the Work.
B.
Storage sheds shall be of sufficient size to store all materials required on the job site at
any one time. Sheds shall be watertight and have floors above the ground.
1.02
TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER
A.
Temporary light and power service shall be furnished by the Contractor.
1.03
TEMPORARY WATER CONNECTION
A.
The Contractor shall make connection and Owner shall furnish all water required in
connection with this contract.
1.04
SECURITY
A.
The General Contractor shall protect all materials and construction as required. He will
be held responsible and required to repair any damage or replace any loss which may
occur during the period of the Contract to any part of the Work, materials, or equipment
including items on site furnished by the Owner or others for the installation by the
Contractor.
1.05
TELEPHONE
A.
The Contractor shall (if he deems necessary) install at his own expense, a single party job
telephone which shall be available for the use of all persons concerned with the
construction of the project. All official long distance calls shall be paid for by the
General Contractor.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
SECTION 01500-2*
1.06
TOILET FACILITIES
A.
The Contractor shall at the beginning of the work, provide on the premises toilet facilities
and enclosures for the use of all workmen on the project. Facilities shall conform to the
requirements of the City.
1.07
TEMPORARY HEAT
A.
The Contractor shall provide any temporary heat which may be required for protecting
and drying out the construction and to enable the Work to be performed in cold weather.
B.
Heat shall be provided by means of an approved temporary heating device which, in
installation and operation, will not damage the finish in the building.
C.
All costs in connection with the providing of temporary heat shall be borne by the
Contractor.
1.08
PROTECTION
A.
Provide and maintain all fences, planking, bridges, bracing, shoring, sheet piling, lights,
barricades, warning signs, and guards as necessary for the protection of streets,
sidewalks, landscaping, adjoining property and the streets adjacent.
B.
Provide protection for all shrubs, trees, lawns, walks, roads, drives, adjacent building and
equipment, both on and off property, and in roads and streets adjacent.
1.09
REMOVAL
A.
Temporary facilities shall be removed promptly as each becomes no longer required.
1.10
FIRST AID PROTECTION
A.
The Contractor shall provide the following: First Aid Accident Cabinets at the job site.
1.11
FIRE PROTECTION DURING CONSTRUCTION
A.
Emergency fire protection shall be provided, using extinguishers, said equipment
conforming to the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters' and relevant
Insurance Company. Particular care shall be exercised when using open flame and
welding and cutting equipment; use only flame proof type tarpaulins. Keep site clean and
orderly with proper protection of combustibles while in use and in storage.
END OF SECTION
SECTION 01562
DUST CONTROL
PART 1
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.2
1.3
GENERAL
The General provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions;
Modifications to the General Conditions, and General Requirements apply to
work specified in this Section Project Drawings.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
This Section describes the requirements pertaining to dust control.
B.
Requirements of this Section may be supplemented elsewhere in these
Specifications.
REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Contractor shall be required to maintain a dust-free environment in areas
adjacent to construction sites and along construction access routes. Methods for
dust control and prevention shall be in accordance with, but not limited to, the
following guidelines:
1.
Dust partitions shall be erected at locations shown on project drawings
and except as otherwise noted, constructed with 3 5/8" metal studs
sheathed with 5/8” (mi thickness) Type X, gypsum board or ½" fire
retardant treated painted plywood, from floor to ceiling or slab above as
indicated on the drawings. All joints shall be sealed with silicone sealant
Doors shall be stopped and weather stripped at perimeters and shall fit
tightly. Doors shall be equipped with closers.
2.
Sticky, multi layer dust mats shall be installed at both sides of dust partition
doors. Pads shall be kept fresh at all times. The mats top sheet shall be removed
regularly enough to avoid tracking dust and dirt out of the project site.
3.
Contractor shall clean up trash and remove debris from site in a once-a-day haul
as specified.
DUST CONTROL
01562 - 1
1.4
4.
Open wheelbarrows loaded with debris shall not be allowed within the building,
other than within the project site. Trash and debris transported by wheelbarrows
shall be bagged and tied. Large items borne by wheelbarrow shall be vacuumed
before transport. Wheelbarrows and other transport equipment must be kept
clean.
5.
For wheelbarrow loads that cannot be bagged, the wheelbarrow shall be covered
with polyethylene plastic and completely sealed with tape to the wheelbarrow.
6.
The site within dust partitions shall be swept using a dry, non-oily dusting
compound. The Contractor shall be required to maintain an industrial vacuum
cleaner on the site. Sweepings shall be vacuumed and the vacuum canister shall
be emptied off site. Vacuums shall be equipped with an appropriate HEPA
exhaust filter.
7.
Persons leaving dust controlled areas shall wipe their feet on a dust mat and
have dust vacuumed from clothing and equipment.
8.
A designated site access route will be specified at Pre-Construction Conference
by which all workmen will traverse the Building to enter and exit the project
site. This route will be coordinated with Building Cleaning Staff through the
Project Coordinator.
9.
Contractor shall have adequate personnel available to maintain the area in a dust
free condition on a continuing basis and shall appoint one person on the crew to
be in charge of dust and debris control.
HVAC DUST CONTROL:
A.
Filter return/exhaust air as indicated on drawings, and cover ends or openings of
ducts which are to remain in order to protect ducts from dust. Filter shall be Farr
30/30 or equal.
END OF SECTION 01562
DUST CONTROL
01562 - 2
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 01600-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and form a part of this Section.
1.01
PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A.
Products, materials and manufactured items or articles of like nature shall as nearly as
possible, be of one brand or manufacturer. No changes or substitutions shall be made without
written consent of the Architect.
1.02
MEASUREMENTS
A.
Before ordering any materials or doing any Work, the Contractor shall verify all
measurements of the building and shall be responsible for correctness of same. No extra
charge or compensation will be allowed because of the differences between actual
measurements and dimensions indicated on the Drawings. Any differences which may be
found, shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work.
1.03
USE OF FOREIGN MATERIALS
A.
The Contractor shall agree to use in the execution of this Contract only materials, supplies
and products manufactured, mined, processed or otherwise produced in the United States or
its territories, if same are available at reasonable and competitive prices per the Supplemental
General Conditions 13.13.
1.04
STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATION
A.
Any material or operation specified by reference to the published specification of a
manufacturer, The American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), The American
Standards Association (ASA), Federal Specifications, or other published standard shall
comply with the requirements of the current specification or standard listed. Should there be
a discrepancy between the referenced specification and the Contract Documents, the latter
shall govern unless written interpretation is obtained from the Architect. Should there be
discrepancies among the referenced specifications or standards, the more stringent
requirements shall govern.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 01600-2
B.
The Contractor shall, if requested, furnish an affidavit from the manufacturer certifying that
the materials or products being furnished meet the requirements specified. Such certification,
however, shall not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of complying with other
requirement of the Contract Documents.
1.05
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A.
All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected,
erected, used, cleaned and conditioned according to manufacturer's directions unless herein
specified to the contrary. Should there be a discrepancy between an installation as required by
the Drawings and/or Specifications and the manufacturer's directions and/or
recommendations, such discrepancy shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and
shall be resolved before the work may proceed.
1.06
TRADE SECTIONS
A.
Sections of this Specification are "all inclusive" in many areas. Certain products, materials,
equipment and/or installation procedures may not apply to the specific work required even
though included in the section. Where there is no indication in the Contract Documents of a
specific item of work to be furnished or installed, the contractor shall confirm same with the
Architect during bidding then ignore the items and not include them in his proposal or scope
of work required.
1.07
STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A.
Materials and equipment not stored on the site shall be stored in a bonded warehouse
approved by the Architect.
B.
All materials shall be stored so as to protect them from the elements and damage of any type
including damage during transit.
1.08
TRADE NAMES
A.
The use of manufacturers' names and serial numbers are given to establish a standard of
manufacturer and not intended to be restrictive or preferential. Similar, equal and approved
materials of other manufacturers will be acceptable, subject to the approval of the Architect,
pursuant to the requirements as hereinafter set forth.
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 01600-3*
1.09
SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
To obtain approval to use unspecified products, Prime Bidders on the General Construction
Contract and of the Mechanical and/or Electrical Subcontractors shall submit written requests
at least ten (10) days before the bid date and hour. Requests received after this time will not
be considered. Requests shall clearly describe the product for which approval is asked,
including all data necessary to demonstrate acceptability. If the product is acceptable, the
Architect will approve it in an Addendum to all Prime Bidders on record.
B.
In the event architectural requirements of an "APPROVED" Material is different from the
specified and/or as indicated on the Drawings, any additional cost involved shall be the
responsibility of the Bidder and his bid must include such cost. No extra cost to the Owner
will be allowed because of the use of such materials.
END OF SECTION
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SECTION 01700-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and form a part of this Section.
1.01
SCOPE
A.
The Work under this Section consists of, but is not limited to, Submittals, Requirements and
Procedures for Project Closeout.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
Section 01300 - Submittals
Section 01710 - Clean-Up
1.03
SUBMITTALS
A.
Construction Completion Requests
1)
Certificate of Substantial Completion
2)
Certificate of Final Inspection
B.
Closeout Submittals: Three (3) copies of closeout submittals of which receipt and acceptance
are prerequisites for payment shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Project "As-Built" Drawings
Guarantees and Bond
Evidence of Compliance with Governing Authorities
a.
Certificate of Inspection
b.
Certificate of Occupancy
Affidavit of "Advertisement of Completion"
Evidence of Payment, and Release of Liens
General Contractors "One Year Guarantee"
Final Application For Payment
List of names of DBE/MBE Contractors used on the project.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SECTION 01700-2
1.04
GUARANTEES AND BONDS
A.
Contractor shall submit to Architect before final acceptance all warranties, guarantees, and
surety bonds. All such documents shall show the name and the location of the project and the
name of the Owner.
1.05
ADVERTISEMENT OF COMPLETION
A.
Contractors performing contracts of fifty thousand dollars ($50,000.00) or more shall
immediately after the completion of the contract, give notice of the completion by an
advertisement in a newspaper of general circulation published within the City or County in
which the work was done, once a week for four (4) consecutive weeks.
B.
In no case will a final settlement be made upon the contract until the expiration of thirty (30)
days after the completion of the notice.
C.
Proof of publication of this notice shall be submitted by the General Contractor to the
Architect by affidavit of the publisher and a printed copy of the notice published. If no
newspaper is published in the County, the notice must be posted at the courthouse for thirty
(30) days and proof shall be made by the Probate Judge, Sheriff and the Contractor.
D.
Contractors performing contracts of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000.00), shall
immediately after completion of the contract, give notice of the completion by an
advertisement in a newspaper of general circulation published within the City or County in
which the work was done for one (1) week. The Contractor shall furnish the Purchasing
Department by affidavit of the publisher a printed copy of the notice published for posting on
their bulletin board for one week. The Contractor shall certify under oath that all bids have
been paid in full. Final payment with the Contractor will be made after the notice has been
posted for one entire week.
1.06
EVIDENCE OF PAYMENTS AND RELEASE OF LIENS
A.
Submit Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims: AIA G706, or approved
equal.
B.
Submit Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA G706A, or approved equal, with:
1.
Consent of Surety to Final Payment: AIA G707, or approved equal.
2.
Contractor's Release or Waiver of Liens
3.
Separate Release of Waivers of Liens for Subcontractors, suppliers and others with
lien rights against property of Owner, together with Lien rights against property of
Owner, together with a list of those parties.
C.
All submittals shall be duly executed before delivery to Architect.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SECTION 01700-3
1.07
FINAL INSPECTION
A.
Certification: Contractor shall submit written certification that: Contract Documents have
been reviewed; Project has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents; Work
has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents; Project is completed and ready
for final inspection.
B.
Inspection: Architect will make final inspection of the project within a reasonable time after
receipt of certification. Should Architect consider that Work is in fact complete in accord
with requirements of Contract Documents, he will request Contractor to make project
closeout submittals. Should Architect consider Work is not complete, he will notify
contractor, in writing, stating reasons. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy
stated deficiencies and send written notice to Architect certifying that Work is complete.
Architect will reinspect the Work.
1.08
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A.
A complete and separate set of blueline prints of the Contract Drawings showing the Work
under this contract shall be maintained at the job at all times, on which shall be marked
clearly, neatly, accurately, and promptly the progress of the work including:
1.
Changes to be made, whether resulting from formal change orders or other
instructions issued by the Architect.
2.
The daily progress, by coloring the various stages of Work exactly as they are erected.
This progress shall incorporate both the changes noted above and all other deviations
from the original drawings, whether resulting from job conditions encountered or
from any other causes. Principal dimensions of concealed work shall be recorded.
B.
The marked-up and colored prints will be used as a guide for determining the progress of the
work installed. They will be inspected monthly by the Architect and they shall be corrected
immediately if found either inaccurate or incomplete.
C.
At the completion of the job, the marked prints shall be submitted to the Architect for final
review, comment and approval. The prints will be returned with appropriate comments and
recommendations, and then a complete set of record "mylar" reproducible sheets shall be
prepared by the General Contractor incorporating all of the changes and added data noted on
the approved marked-up prints. The record "mylar" sheets shall be given to the Architect
upon completion and as a requirement prior to the issuance of the "Final" Certificate of
Payment.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SECTION 01700-4
D.
"Mylar" reproducible sheets of the original drawings shall be obtained from the Architect with
respective cost of reproduction and mailing being borne and paid by the General Contractor
involved in making the record drawings.
1.09
GUARANTEES AND BONDS
A.
Contractor shall submit to Architect before final acceptance all warranties, guarantees, and
surety bonds. All such documents shall show the name and location of the project and the
name of the Owner.
1.10
GENERAL CONTRACTOR ONE-YEAR GUARANTEE
A.
The general contractor shall submit in addition to any other expressed guarantees and/or
warranties, a guarantee of all work under this contract for a period of one year from date of
final acceptance.
1.11
FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS
A.
Submit final statement of accounting to Architect. Statement shall reflect all adjustments,
including, but not necessarily limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Original Contract Sum
Additions and Deductions resulting from:
1.
Previous change orders
2.
Cash Allowances
3.
Unit Prices
4.
Other Adjustments
5.
Deductions for Uncorrected Work
6.
Penalties and Bonuses
7.
Deductions for Liquidated Damages
8.
Deductions for Reinspection Payments
Total Contract Sum, as adjusted
Previous Payments
Sum remaining due
Architect will prepare final change order, reflecting approved adjustments to Contract sum
not previously made by change orders.
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SECTION 01700-5*
1.12
FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A.
Contractor shall submit final application in accord with requirements of General and/or
Supplementary Conditions.
1.13
DBE/MBE CONTRACTORS
A.
After job closeout and before the General Contractor receives the final payment of retainage,
the General Contractor will
submit to CIA names of DBE/MBE contractors used on the job along with the net dollar
amount paid to each such contractor.
1.14
YEAR END INSPECTION
A.
Twenty (20) days prior to expiration of one year from date of "Final Acceptance", Contractor
shall notify Architect in writing of Year End Inspection. Architect will make visual inspection
of the project in company with owner and contractor to determine whether correction of
work is required, in accord with provisions of General Conditions. For guarantees beyond
one year, Architect will make inspections at request of Owner, after notification to contractor.
Architect will promptly notify contractor in writing of any observed deficiencies.
END OF SECTION
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
CLEANING
SECTION 01710-1
PART ONE - GENERAL
1.00
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to and form a part of this Section.
1.01
DESCRIPTION:
A.
Execute cleaning during progress of the work, and at completion of the work, as required by
General Conditions.
B.
Related requirements in other parts of the Specifications: Section 0700 - General Conditions
1.02
DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and
antipollution laws.
PART TWO - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS:
A.
Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and
which will not damage surfaces.
B.
Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by cleaning materials
manufacturer.
C.
Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.
CLEANING
SECTION 01710-2*
PART THREE - EXECUTION
3.01
DURING CONSTRUCTION:
A.
Execute daily cleaning to keep the work, site and adjacent properties free from accumulations
of waste materials, rubbish and windblown debris, resulting from construction operations.
B.
Provide on-site containers for the collection of waste materials, debris and rubbish.
C.
Remove waste materials, debris and rubbish form the site.
3.02
FINAL CLEANING
A.
Employ workmen for final cleaning.
B.
Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign
materials from sight-exposed exterior surfaces.
C.
Scratched, marred or other disfigured aluminum or other finished metals shall be replaced.
D.
Prior to final completion, Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight-exposed surfaces
and all work areas to verify that the entire work is clean.
E.
Upon completion of final cleaning, cleaning equipment, materials and debris shall be removed
from the construction site and the premises left clean.
END OF SECTION
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 230517 - SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Sleeves.
Sleeve-seal systems.
Grout.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded
steel collar; zinc coated.
B.
Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves:
coated, with plain ends.
2.2
ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc
SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
CALPICO, Inc.
Metraflex Company (The).
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Proco Products, Inc.
Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular
space between piping and sleeve.
1.
2.
3.
Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.
Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating of length
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.3
GROUT
A.
Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,
hydraulic-cement grout.
B.
Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
D.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B.
For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls.
1.
C.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
D.
3.
3.2
Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal
system.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.
1.
2.
E.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants
specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements
for firestopping specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service
piping entries into building.
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
3.3
Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a
watertight seal.
SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE
A.
Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:
1.
Exterior Concrete Walls above Grade:
a.
2.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel wall sleeves or Galvanized-steelpipe sleeves.
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6:
system.
1)
3.
Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between
piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.
Concrete Slabs above Grade:
a.
4.
Galvanized-steel wall sleeves with sleeve-seal
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
Interior Partitions:
a.
Piping Smaller Than NPS 6: Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.
END OF SECTION 230517
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING
230517 - 3
[THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK]
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 230523 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Brass ball valves.
Bronze ball valves.
Iron, single-flange butterfly valves.
Bronze swing check valves.
Iron swing check valves.
Bronze gate valves.
Iron gate valves.
Bronze globe valves.
Iron globe valves.
Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
schedules.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
design criteria.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A.
Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
2.
3.
E.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Gate Valves: With rising stem.
Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.
Valve-End Connections:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
BRASS BALL VALVES
A.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
DynaQuip Controls.
Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc.
Hammond Valve.
Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation.
Jomar International, LTD.
Kitz Corporation.
Legend Valve.
Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
RuB Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
SWP Rating: 150 psig.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Body Design: Two piece.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.3
Body Material: Forged brass.
Ends: Threaded.
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Stem: Brass.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Port: Full.
BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.4
American Valve, Inc.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Hammond Valve.
Lance Valves; a division of Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.
Legend Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
SWP Rating: 150 psig.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Body Design: Two piece.
Body Material: Bronze.
Ends: Threaded.
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Stem: Bronze.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Port: Full.
IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES
A.
150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
ABZ Valve and Controls; a division of ABZ Manufacturing, Inc.
Bray Controls; a division of Bray International.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
Cooper Cameron Valves; a division of Cooper Cameron Corp.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.5
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
DeZurik Water Controls.
Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Norriseal; a Dover Corporation company.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Spence Strainers International; a division of CIRCOR International.
Tyco Valves & Controls; a unit of Tyco Flow Control.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated
pressure without use of downstream flange.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.
Seat: EPDM.
Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.
Disc: Aluminum bronze.
BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
2.
American Valve, Inc.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Powell Valves.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
Body Design: Horizontal flow.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
e.
f.
B.
Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
American Valve, Inc.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Kitz Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.6
Ends: Threaded.
Disc: Bronze.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3.
CWP Rating: 300 psig.
Body Design: Horizontal flow.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze.
Ends: Threaded.
Disc: Bronze.
IRON SWING CHECK VALVES
A.
Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
Legend Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Powell Valves.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Sure Flow Equipment Inc.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Description:
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.7
Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.
NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.
Body Design: Clear or full waterway.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
Ends: Flanged.
Trim: Bronze.
Gasket: Asbestos free.
BRONZE GATE VALVES
A.
Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
American Valve, Inc.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Powell Valves.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
Ends: Threaded[ or solder joint].
Stem: Bronze.
Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
Packing: Asbestos free.
Handwheel: Malleable iron[, bronze, or aluminum].
Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
g.
h.
i.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.8
Powell Valves.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2.
CWP Rating: 300 psig.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet.
Ends: Threaded.
Stem: Bronze.
Disc: Solid wedge; bronze.
Packing: Asbestos free.
Handwheel: Malleable iron.
IRON GATE VALVES
A.
Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
B.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Flo Fab Inc.
Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
Legend Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Powell Valves.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig.
NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
Ends: Flanged.
Trim: Bronze.
Disc: Solid wedge.
Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.9
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Powell Valves.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 500 psig.
NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 300 psig.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
Ends: Flanged.
Trim: Bronze.
Disc: Solid wedge.
Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
BRONZE GLOBE VALVES
A.
Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Powell Valves.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet.
Ends: Threaded or solder joint.
Stem and Disc: Bronze.
Packing: Asbestos free.
Handwheel: Malleable iron.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.10
A.
IRON GLOBE VALVES
Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Kitz Corporation.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Powell Valves.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Zy-Tech Global Industries, Inc.
Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I.
CWP Rating: 200 psig.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
Ends: Flanged.
Trim: Bronze.
Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
Class 250, Iron Globe Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.
Hammond Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I.
CWP Rating: 500 psig.
Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet.
Ends: Flanged.
Trim: Bronze.
Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
E.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,
maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
E.
Install swing check valves for proper direction of flow and in horizontal position with hinge pin
level.
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
3.4
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
2.
3.
Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves.
Throttling Service, Except Steam: Globe or ball valves.
Pump-Discharge Check Valves:
a.
NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
b.
NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with
spring.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.5
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends.
For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end
option is indicated in valve schedules below.
For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.
CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.6
Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded
ends.
Bronze Angle Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS, bronze.
Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of
flanged ends.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,
aluminum-bronze disc.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 14 to NPS 24: 150 CWP, EPDM seat,
aluminum-bronze disc.
Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.
Iron Globe Valves: Class 125.
HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
2.
Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded
ends.
Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 11
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
4.
5.
B.
Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, RS.
Bronze Globe Valves: Class 125, bronze disc.
Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of
flanged ends.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: 200 CWP, EPDM seat,
aluminum-bronze disc.
Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 14 to NPS 24: 150 CWP, EPDM seat,
aluminum-bronze disc.
Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats.
Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y.
Iron Globe Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12: Class 125.
END OF SECTION 230523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING
230523 - 12
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 230533 - HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes heat tracing with the following electric heating cables:
1.
Self-regulating, parallel resistance.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and
accessories for each type of product indicated.
1.
1.3
Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for
each electric heating cable required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control test reports.
B.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.6
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace electric heating cable that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
230533 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
BH Thermal Corporation.
Chromalox, Inc.; Wiegard Industrial Division; Emerson Electric Company.
Delta-Therm Corporation.
Easy Heat Inc.
Nelson Heat Trace.
Pyrotenax; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.
Raychem; a division of Tyco Thermal Controls.
Thermon Manufacturing Co.
Trasor Corp.
B.
Heating Element: Pair of parallel No. 18 AWG, tinned, stranded copper bus wires embedded in
crosslinked conductive polymer core, which varies heat output in response to temperature along
its length. Terminate with waterproof, factory-assembled nonheating leads with connectors at
one end, and seal the opposite end watertight. Cable shall be capable of crossing over itself
once without overheating.
C.
Electrical Insulating Jacket: Flame-retardant polyolefin.
D.
Cable Cover: Tinned-copper braid, and polyolefin outer jacket with UV inhibitor.
E.
Maximum Operating Temperature (Power On): 150 deg F.
F.
Maximum Exposure Temperature (Power Off): 185 deg.
G.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 300 deg F.
H.
Capacities and Characteristics:
1.
2.
2.2
Maximum Heat Output: 3 W/ft..
Volts: 120V.
CONTROLS
A.
Remote bulb unit with adjustable temperature range from 30 to 50 deg F.
B.
Snap action; open-on-rise, single-pole switch with minimum current rating adequate for
connected cable.
C.
Remote bulb on capillary, resistance temperature device, or thermistor for directly sensing pipewall temperature.
D.
Corrosion-resistant, waterproof control enclosure.
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
230533 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.3
ACCESSORIES
A.
Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end
seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
B.
Warning Labels:
Equipment."
C.
Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with
pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.
1.
2.
Refer to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inches minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install electric heating cable across expansion joints according to manufacturer's written
recommendations using slack cable to allow movement without damage to cable.
B.
Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is installed.
C.
Install electric heating cables according to IEEE 515.1.
D.
Install insulation over piping with electric cables according to Division 23 Section "HVAC
Insulation."
E.
Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating cables.
F.
Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges.
G.
Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage.
H.
Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
I.
Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors
and Cables."
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as
insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.
1.
Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
230533 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.
Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current
simultaneously.
B.
Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal
insulation on pipe-mounting cables.
C.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION 230533
HEAT TRACING FOR HVAC PIPING
230533 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Equipment labels.
Warning signs and labels.
Pipe labels.
ACTION SUBMITTAL
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Plastic Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
2.2
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving,
1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
Letter Color: White.
Background Color: Black.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS
A.
Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16
inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Letter Color: White.
C.
Background Color: Black.
D.
Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F.
E.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2
by 3/4 inch.
F.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2
inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater
viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal
lettering.
G.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
H.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
I.
Label Content:
instructions.
2.3
Include caution and warning information, plus emergency notification
PIPE LABELS
A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.2
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1.
Heating Water Piping:
a.
b.
2.
Background Color: Red.
Letter Color: White.
Refrigerant Piping:
a.
b.
Background Color: Blue.
Letter Color: White.
END OF SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
230553 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
Balancing Air Systems:
a.
b.
1.2
Constant-volume air systems.
Variable-air-volume systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B.
NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D.
TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E.
TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Certified TAB reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC, NEBB or AABB.
B.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1.
2.
C.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures
specified and referenced in this Specification.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Owner.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
D.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111,
Section 5, "Instrumentation."
E.
ASHRAE Compliance:
Balancing."
F.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance:
Applicable
Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing."
Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air
requirements
in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B.
Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer
wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify
that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C.
Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D.
Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E.
Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to
verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section
"Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in
plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required.
F.
Examine equipment performance data including fan curves.
1.
2.
Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects
that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or
part of a system.
Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when
installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment
performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in
AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design."
Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
G.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing,
cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed.
H.
Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
I.
Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned
and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K.
Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated
perforations.
L.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
M.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
N.
Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
O.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.3
Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" and in this Section.
1.
B.
Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1.
2.
After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness
as used to construct ducts.
Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation,
coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation."
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position
indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other
suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L.
Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.5
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure total airflow.
a.
2.
Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse
measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total
airflow.
Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
b.
c.
d.
3.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heatrecovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus
actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments
to accommodate actual conditions.
Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than
indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling
units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit
performance.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, fullheating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a.
2.
3.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
D.
Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
C.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct
restrictions.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of
indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and
the dampers at air terminals.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
2.
3.6
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A.
Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point
airflow with the remainder at maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal
units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they
are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
B.
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a
position that simulates full-cooling load.
Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for
the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to
make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a.
6.
Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
7.
8.
C.
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
Record final fan-performance data.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan systems
have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-volume air
systems.
Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify operation of the
static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets
downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if one is
installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure static
pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a.
8.
Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow.
a.
D.
Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan systems have
been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.7
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of terminal
units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are
distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow controller set
at maximum airflow.
Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and continuing
progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to
indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from
terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
Measure static pressure at the sensor.
Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the
same as described for constant-volume air systems.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A.
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
2.
3.
Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.
Motor horsepower rating.
Motor rpm.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
3.8
Efficiency rating.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying
from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper
operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number,
serial number, and nameplate data.
PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A.
Verify proper rotation of fans.
B.
Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
C.
Record compressor data.
3.9
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A.
Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.10
A.
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
Check the refrigerant charge.
Check the condition of filters.
Check the condition of coils.
Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken. Report deficiencies.
Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is
to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.
Verify the following:
1.
2.
New filters are installed.
Coils are clean and fins combed.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.11
A.
A.
3.13
A.
Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
REPORTING
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
FINAL REPORT
General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections
for tested systems and balanced systems.
1.
2.
B.
Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows, and
determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and coils.
Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated rates. If increase or
decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
Balance each air outlet.
TOLERANCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.12
Drain pans are clean.
Fans are clean.
Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the
certified testing and balancing engineer.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following:
1.
Fan curves.
2.
Manufacturers' test data.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
4.
C.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and
product data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Title page.
Name and address of the TAB contractor.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
3.14
Indicated versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
Conditions of filters.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced conditions
are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer and winter conditions.
END OF SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230593 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
1.2
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.
Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 23 Section "HVAC Piping Insulation."
2.
Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of
insulation and hanger.
Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each
type of insulation.
Detail application of field-applied jackets.
Detail application at linkages of control devices.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,
and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
2.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum
Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule"
articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
D.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
F.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
G.
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap.
Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide
insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in
"Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
DUCT INSULATION
CertainTeed Corp.; Commercial Board.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; FBX.
Johns Manville; 800 Series Spin-Glas.
Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board.
Manson Insulation Inc.; AK Board.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.
230713 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.2
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
C.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for
bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
2.3
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-127.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-60/85-70.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-82.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-50.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
B.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 30-80/30-90.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-76.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 95-44.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
5.
2.6
Vinyl Jacket: White vinyl with a permeance of 1.3 perms (0.86 metric perm) when tested
according to ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure A, and complying with NFPA 90A and
NFPA 90B.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.
C.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and
kraft paper.
Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil-thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing
membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a
rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white
aluminum-foil facing.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
2.7
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.
ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
Polyguard Products, Inc.; Alumaguard 60.
TAPES
A.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
7.
B.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.8
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
Compac Corporation; 120.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with[wing seal or [losed seal.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
B.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
b.
c.
d.
DUCT INSULATION
AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers.
GEMCO; Perforated Base.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle.
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
230713 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
b.
3.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inchthick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place
but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
C.
AGM Industries, Inc.; RC-150.
GEMCO; R-150.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA-150.
Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips.
GEMCO.
Midwest Fasteners, Inc.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B.
Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
F.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
J.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
K.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
M.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
N.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.3
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations:
penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Install insulation continuously through roof
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at
fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
1.
E.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.4
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for
firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper
sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct
insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm).
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
2.
3.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a.
b.
5.
6.
7.
B.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.
1.
2.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a.
b.
5.
6.
3.5
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, space pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and
inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with
individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- wide joint strips at
end joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 11
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
3.6
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints.
FINISHES
A.
3.7
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
3.8
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.9
Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air.
Indoor, concealed return located in unconditioned space.
Indoor, exposed return located in unconditioned space.
Indoor, concealed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
Indoor, exposed exhaust between isolation damper and penetration of building exterior.
Outdoor, concealed supply and return.
Outdoor, exposed supply and return.
Fibrous-glass ducts.
Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and
1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
B.
Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket 2 inches thick and
1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 12
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and
1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
D.
Concealed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick
and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
E.
Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 2 inches thick and
1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
F.
Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket 2 inches thick and
1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
G.
Exposed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick
and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
H.
Exposed, Exhaust-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber blanket, 1-1/2 inches thick
and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.10
ABOVEGROUND, OUTDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Concealed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 3 inches thick and 3lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
C.
Concealed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 3 inches thick and 3lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
D.
Concealed, Outdoor-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 3 inches thick and
3-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
E.
Exposed, Supply-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 3 inches thick and 3lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
F.
Exposed, Return-Air Duct and Plenum Insulation: Mineral-fiber board, 3 inches thick and 3lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
3.11
OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C.
Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, up to 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces up to 72 Inches:
1.
Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick.
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 13
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
D.
Ducts and Plenums, Exposed, Larger Than 48 Inches in Diameter or with Flat Surfaces Larger
Than 72 Inches:
1.
Aluminum, Smooth with 1-1/4-Inch-Deep Corrugations: 0.032 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 230713
DUCT INSULATION
230713 - 14
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:
1.
Heating hot-water piping, indoors and outdoors.
2.
Refrigerant suction and hot-gas piping, indoors and outdoors.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation."
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,
mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
2.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
B.
Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less
than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
D.
Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing
process.
E.
Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply
with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
F.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
2.2
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aerocel.
Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex.
K-Flex USA; Insul-Lock, Insul-Tube, and K-FLEX LS.
Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200.
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied
jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
2.3
Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Ramcote 1200 and Quik-Cote.
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
Aeroflex USA, Inc.; Aeroseal.
Armacell LLC; Armaflex 520 Adhesive.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-75.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
d.
2.
3.
C.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
D.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-127.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-60/85-70.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2,
Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
2.4
K-Flex USA; R-373 Contact Adhesive.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-82.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 85-50.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 30-80/30-90.
Vimasco Corporation; 749.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
Joint Sealants:
B.
FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-76.
Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405.
Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; 95-44.
Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 44-05.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; CP-76.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
6.
7.
2.6
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller
Company; Metal Jacketing Systems.
ITW Insulation Systems; Aluminum and Stainless Steel Jacketing.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate.
Sheet and roll stock ready for shop or field sizing.
Finish and thickness are indicated in field-applied jacket schedules.
Moisture Barrier for Outdoor Applications: 3-mil-thick, heat-bonded polyethylene and
kraft paper.
Factory-Fabricated Fitting Covers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Same material, finish, and thickness as jacket.
Preformed 2-piece or gore, 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows.
Tee covers.
Flange and union covers.
End caps.
Beveled collars.
Valve covers.
Field fabricate fitting covers only if factory-fabricated fitting covers are not
available.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.8
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836.
Compac Corporation; 104 and 105.
Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 491 AWF FSK.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827.
Compac Corporation; 110 and 111.
Venture Tape; 1525 CW NT, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ.
Width: 3 inches (75 mm).
Thickness: 6.5 mils (0.16 mm).
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch (1.0 N/mm) in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch (7.2 N/mm) in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF.
Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800.
Compac Corporation; 120.
Venture Tape; 3520 CW.
Width: 2 inches.
Thickness: 3.7 mils.
Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 5 percent.
Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.9
SECUREMENTS
A.
Aluminum Bands: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
B.
ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals.
RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch- wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
C.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with
stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.2
Comply with
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.3
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations:
penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Install insulation continuously through roof
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of
roof flashing.
Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations:
continuously through wall penetrations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface
and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation,
install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal
joint with joint sealant.
Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at
least 2 inches.
Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
C.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
D.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations:
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
E.
Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for
firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
3.4
Install insulation
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with requirements in
Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
C.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
D.
Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the
following:
1.
2.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same
thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe
insulation.
When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation
from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
4.
5.
3.5
insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide
the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of
mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached
insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over
adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover
and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating
cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a
smooth finish.
Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed
surfaces with a metal jacket.
INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
A.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate
openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
D.
Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet insulation of same thickness as
pipe insulation.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to
eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe and sheet
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow
valve operation without disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 11
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.6
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER PREFORMED PIPE INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
D.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION
A.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 12
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
4.
5.
B.
3.8
Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at
end joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-barrier mastic.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end
joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof
sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12
inches o.c. and at end joints.
FINISHES
A.
3.9
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
3.10
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system,
selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.11
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
Underground piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F (93 Deg C) and Below: Insulation shall be
the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.
B.
Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.
C.
Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Flexible elastomeric, 1 inch thick.
3.12
A.
OUTDOOR, ABOVEGROUND PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 200 Deg F and Below: Insulation shall be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 2 inches thick.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 13
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Piping: Insulation shall be the following:
1.
Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
C.
Refrigerant Suction and Hot-Gas Flexible Tubing: Insulation shall be the following:
1.
3.13
Flexible Elastomeric: 2 inches thick.
OUTDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE
A.
Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the
field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.
B.
If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C.
Piping, Concealed:
1.
Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick.
D.
Piping, Exposed:
1.
Aluminum, Smooth: 0.016 inch thick.
END OF SECTION 230719
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
230719 - 14
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 230900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION
A. This section defines the basic materials and methods used in the installation of Building
Automation System (BAS) control products to provide the functions necessary for control of
the mechanical and other specified systems on this project.
B. The Building Automation System (BAS) is to provide a Bacnet peer-to-peer networked, standalone, distributed control system for building mechanical and electrical systems. The BAS
shall include an operator workstation also known as Engineering Control Center (ECC),
microprocessor based control units panels, instrumentation end control devices, wiring, piping,
and related systems to provide centralized and facility wide control functions.
C. The BAS shall be designed such that each mechanical and electrical system will be able to
operate under stand-alone control. As such, in the event of a network communication failure,
or the loss of any other controller, the control system shall continue to independently operate
under control.
1.2
SCOPE
A.
Provide all labor, materials, programming and supervision necessary to install a Bacnet
Direct Digital control system (DDC).
B.
The scope of work shall include but not be limited to the following: Host to be located per
owner.
The Control Contractor shall furnish all interlock wiring connected to the Bacnet controls
and instrumentation systems.
C.
All conduits in connection with the controls and instrumentation system shall be furnished
and installed by this Contractor. Plenum rates cable shall be used above lift out ceilings.
D.
The Control Contractor shall complete all sensing and control installations including
electrical and electronic components, not the Mechanical Contractor, unless otherwise
required. Controls valves to be installed by the Mechanical Contractor.
E.
Provide a comprehensive operator and technician-training program as described herein.
F.
Provide as-built documentation, software, and all DDC control logic and all associated
support documentation on approved media, which accurately represents the final installed
system.
G.
Provide a native Bacnet control system.
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.3
COORDINATION
A.
1.4
The Control Contractor shall provide the controls on the AHU, Chiller, Boiler, Pumps and
Fans, and host processor with graphical interface to all points.
SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE CONTRACT
A.
System Warranty
All control devices provided by this Contractor shall be warranted to be free of defects in
workmanship and material for a period of one (1) year from the date of Substantial
Completion. Any equipment found to be defective during this period shall be repaired or
replaced without expense to the Owner. The Contractor shall accomplish this work during
normal working hours (8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding holidays).
The Contractor shall respond to all warranty items within one working day from when they
are reported. Provide a report to the Owners Maintenance Department identifying the
problem, the devices affected and the nature of the repair or replacement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
KMC Controls, Johnson Controls, Siemens or approved equal.
2.2
COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK, PC, AND MODEM SUPPORT
1.
The Communications network between buildings shall utilize the existing Ethernet system.
IP addresses shall be provided by the Owner.
2.
Provide one (1) Microsoft Windows compatible personal computer (PC) utilizing Intel
microprocessor to communicate with the stand alone Global LAN Controller (GC/LAN) if
required or any stand alone Unitary Controllers (UC) located throughout the facility
without the (GC). The PC shall be located at the maintenance office.
3.
PC Hardware
Provide a PC with the following minimum specifications:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Microsoft Windows Compatible
2 GHz Intel Pentium Processor
2 GB RAM
24 Bit Graphic Resolution Card.
10/100 Ethernet Card
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
4.
200 GB Hard Drive
1.44 MB disk Drive
24x speed CD Read/Write Drive
21” HI RES Flat Screen
Inkjet Printer
600 KVA UPS
Factory installed Microsoft Windows XP Professional or Windows 7
Professional operating system
PC Software
The operator interface panel software shall be compatible with Microsoft Windows XP or
7 Professional operating systems. All operating system software, control software, and
graphics generation software shall be provided, along with required usage licenses. All
software shall be provided for the Owner to make any changes to the system without
Control Contractor support. (i.e. if the Owner needs to change a graphic, provide the
graphic software that generated the original)
a. Provide all hardware and software necessary to allow remote communications via
modem and Internet to off-site locations. The off site locations shall be able to
communicate with the remote site system even if the remote PC is turned off or not
functioning. If a gate way or key is required for any remote communication function
what so ever, the control contractor shall provide to the owner at no cost for as many
remote sites present and future as the owners desires.
b. Provide all hardware and software necessary to allow remote communications via
Internet or IP-WAN to off-site locations.
2.3
System Controllers, Field Panels, Local Controllers, Global Controllers, Etc.
A.
Global LAN Controller Panel (GC/LAN)
The GC/LAN shall be capable of operating in a stand alone or in a Peer-to-Peer network
environment. Like the Field Panels, the GC/LAN shall have on-board I/O points directly
controlled by the GC/LAN programming. The GC/LAN I/O points shall be modular with
the capability of monitoring and controlling up to 128 input/outputs hardware points.
The main network shall utilize either Ethernet or RS485 media and support a minimum of
32 GC/LAN controllers on a full peer to peer communications network. Each GC/LAN
shall support at a minimum 2 sub LAN networks capable of communicating with up to
124 Field Panels or Local Controllers per LAN. All sub LAN networks shall be true peerto-peer networks.
This controller may also be used to optimize the energy consumption by implementing
various Energy Management strategies such as; demand limiting, duty cycling, outside air
optimization, temperature setup/setback optimum start/stop routines, etc. for sub LAN
devices.
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
Dedicated ports shall be provided for two simultaneous direct connected operator stations
plus an auto dial/auto answer modem and printer port. Other on board features shall
include:
A. Stand-alone or network peer-to-peer capability
B. 2-way modem communications, Alarm page out capability
C. Up to 128 universal inputs-software selectable as analog or digital with standard and
custom ranges. Analog input resolution shall be 16-bit minimum. Signal types shall be
jumper selectable and shall include:
1. Dry Contact
2. 4-20 mA
3. 10 K Ohm Thermistor
4. 0-5 VDC
D. Up to 128 universal outputs, software selectable as analog or digital with standard
custom ranges. Analog output resolution shall be 12-bit minimum. Optional output
cards all with Hand-Off-Auto switches and switch feedback for the following outputs:
1. 24 VAC Zero crossing Triac
2. N.C. Form A relay output
3. N.O. Form A relay output
4. 4-20ma with override potentiometer
5. DC analog output with override potentiometer
E. 256 variable points, software selectable as analog or digital with standard and custom
ranges; may have manually set or program driven values.
F. 512 network points in and 64 network points out
G. Alarm buffering up to 256 alarms, 50 alarm messages for distribution
H. 128 standard P, PI, or PID controllers each with the following adjustable parameters:
1. Proportional Band
2. Integral factor, minutes/hours
3. Derivative factor
4. Bias
5. Action (direct/reverse)
6. Input point (as input or variable)
7. Setpoint (as variable)
I. 128 User definable control basic programs
J. 96 Trend Logs for data logging purposes, each supporting up to six analog, digital or
virtual elements or points; when linked to the operating system these logs may be
graphically displayed
K. 128 Runtime logs with time/date stamp and cumulative runtime
L. 64 system control groups for organizing controller selected points or elements into a
real time display or color graphic.
M. 64 weekly time schedules with overrides
N. 16 annual routines for holiday schedules
O. 5 sensor conversion tables for creating linear curves
P. 6 access levels with 256 individual user passwords
Q. On-board 68 character full English alarm messages
R. On-board 68 character full English maintenance messages
S. Power-fail with auto restart capabilities
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
T. Programs and program parameters are stored in non-volatile flash memory
B.
TERMINAL UNIT CONTROLLERS (TUC)
Terminal Unit Controllers shall utilize a high speed RISC processor that will read all
inputs, execute all programs and write to all its outputs at least ten (10) times per second.
The inputs and the outputs shall be defined in software as an analog input, digital input,
analog output, or digital output. The controller shall be able to survive the application of
240 VAC to any input channel and/or the RS-485 communications trunk. The enclosure
shall have a UL 94 5V rating or equivalent.
Terminal Unit controllers shall communicate on a full peer-to-peer basis with up to 123
other local controllers and/or terminal unit controllers on the Terminal Unit Controller
LAN without the aid of a higher level communications processor. Each of these 124 units
shall be able to pass a minimum of thirty-two (32) pieces of data up to the Local
Controller LAN and accept a minimum of thirty-two (32) pieces of data from the LAN.
Regardless of LAN size, it shall never take longer than four (4) seconds for a transmission
to occur unless the Terminal Unit controller LAN has been configured to handle modem
communications without the aid of a higher level communications processor. Modem
communications shall occur upon event, schedule or manual command. The Terminal Unit
Controller LAN shall be capable of communicating with remote PC’s, printers, or pagers.
The twenty (20) character English language descriptors assigned to points, trend logs,
routines, graphics, etc. shall reside at the Terminal Unit Controller. These descriptors
shall be accessible by the host software and by portable hand held tools that may be used
to access the Local Controller by service personnel. Each Local Controller shall have a
minimum of six (6) levels of access. Additionally, all output points on the Local
Controller shall have their own independently assignable levels of access.
A Terminal Unit Controller shall support a minimum of four (4) trend logs. At least two
(2) of these trend logs shall be able to support up to four (4) points each and store up to
400 samples for each point with a resolution of from one (1) second to ninety-nine (99)
hours. The Terminal Unit Controller shall also have its own onboard stop/start routine,
and daylight savings time compensation. The Terminal Unit Controller shall have a
stop/start routine which shall accommodate up to four (4) on/off times in each twenty-four
(24) hour period, however, it shall not be necessary to turn loads off prior to midnight and
then restart them during the next period. Systems that do this are not acceptable. The
stop/start routine shall accept a minimum of two (2) override conditions.
Application Specific Terminal Unit Controllers shall be available in the following
configurations:
Fan Coil Unit Controller
Fan Coil Unit Controller with Auxiliary Heat
Fan Coil Unit Controller with variable fan speed control
Air Handling Unit Controller
Heat Pump Controller
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
Rooftop Unit Controller
2.5
MICROPROCESSOR BASED SPACE SENSOR
A. A microprocessor based space sensor residing on a RS-485 network shall provide the
following functions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Space temperature measurement and indication
Outside air temperature indication
Space temperature setpoint adjustment
View the value of any input or output in the system
Change the value of any input, output or software point in the system
The above functions shall be field programmable if desired
All Terminal unit controllers shall be capable of interface to this microprocessor based
room sensor.
In addition to the space temperature input, a Digital Input shall also be available at the
sensor in addition to all other inputs at the associated controller.
The microprocessor based room sensor shall include an RJ11 jack for connection of a PC
to the entire LAN network. Microprocessor based sensors whose RJ11 jack only allows
communication with the controller to which it is connected shall not be acceptable.
2.6
SOFTWARE
The Operator workstation interface software shall be designed to operate on the Windows XP or 7
Professional OS platform.
A.
Basic Interface Description
1. Operator workstation interface software shall optimize operator understanding through the
use of English language prompting, English language point identification and industry
standard PC application software. The software shall provide, as a minimum, the
following functionality:
a. Real-time graphical viewing and control of environment
b. Scheduling and override of building operations
c. Collection and analysis of historical data and dynamic data (trend
plot)
d. Definition and construction of dynamic color graphic displays
e. Editing, programming, storage and downloading of global
controller databases
f. Alarm reporting, routing, messaging, and acknowledgment
2. Provide a graphical user interface, which shall minimize the use of keyboard through the
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
use of a mouse or similar pointing device and “point and click” approach to menu
selection.
3. The software shall provide a multi-tasking type environment that allows the user to run
several applications simultaneously. Other Windows applications shall run simultaneously
with the DDC software. The mouse or Keyboard shall be used to quickly select and
switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to work in Microsoft
Word, Excel, and other Windows based software packages, while concurrently
annunciation on-line DDC alarms and monitoring information.
Provide functionality such that any of the following may be performed simultaneously online, and in any combination, via user-sized windows:
a. Dynamic color graphics and graphic control
b. Alarm management, routing to designated locations, and
customized messages
c. Week at a Glance Time-of-Day scheduling
d. Trend data definition and presentation
e. Graphic definition and construction
f. Program and point database editing on-line
4. Provide a security system that prevents unauthorized use unless the operator is logged on.
Access shall be limited to the operator’s terminal functions unless the user is logged on.
Each operator Terminal shall provide security for 50 users (minimum). Each user shall
have an individual password.
5. Operator Activity Tracking - An audit trail report to track system changes, accounting for
operator initiated actions, changes made by a particular person or changes made to a
specific piece of equipment designated time frame, shall be printable and archived for
future use. The operator activity tracking shall be in a tamper-proof buffer file.
6. Reports shall be generated on demand or via pre-defined schedule and directed to CRT
displays, printers or disk. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain
the following types of reports:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
A general listing of all or selected points in the network
List of all points currently in alarm
List of all points currently in override status
List of all disabled points
List of all points currently locked out
List of user accounts and access levels
List all weekly schedules
List of limits and dead-bands
Excel reports
System diagnostic reports including, list of DDC panels on line
and communicating, status of all DDC terminal unit device points
k. List of programs
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Scheduling and override
Provide a graphical spreadsheet-type format for simplification of time-of-day scheduling
and overrides of building operations. Schedules reside in both the PC workstation and
DDC Global Controller to ensure time equipment scheduling when PC is off-line, PC is
not required to execute time scheduling. Provide override access through menu selection
or function key. Provide the following spreadsheet graphic types as a minimum:
1. Display of Weekly schedules shall show all information in easy to read 7day (week) format for each schedule. This includes all on/off times for
each day along with all optimum start information.
2. Holiday schedules shall show all dates that are to be holidays. Holidays
shall be shown on the terminal in a graphical calendar format showing all
scheduled days for a given month. User shall be able to easily scroll
through the months for each year. Each day assigned as a holiday shall
display as "All Off" or show "Scheduled" for that day.
3. Event schedules shall be shown in the same graphical calendar format and
manner as Holiday schedules. Event schedules allow for scheduling of
special events. After an event has elapsed, control returns to normal
schedule.
Operator shall be able to change all information for a given Weekly, Holiday or Event
schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access. This includes all information
that has to do with optimum start including assignments such as sensors to use and
heating/cooling factors.
B. Provide trending capabilities that allow the user to easily monitor and preserve records of
system activity over an extended period of time. Any system point may be trended
automatically at time-based intervals or change of value, both of which shall be userdefinable. Trend data may be stored on hard disk for future diagnostics and reporting.
Additionally, trend data may be archived to network drives or removable disk media for
future retrieval.
C. Trend data reports shall be provided to allow the user to view all trended point data.
Reports may be customized to include individual point or predefined groups of at least six
points. Provide additional functionality to allow predefined groups of up to 250 trended
points to be easily transferred on-line to Microsoft Excel.
D. Alarm Indication
E. System Terminal shall provide audible, visual and printed means of alarm indication. The
Alarm Dialog box shall always become the Top Dialog box regardless of the application(s)
being run at the time (such as a word processor). Printout of alarms shall be sent to the
assigned terminal and port.
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
F. Provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the hard disk of the system
terminal. Each entry shall include point descriptor and address, time and date of alarm
occurrence, point value at time of alarm, time and date of point return to normal condition,
time and date of alarm acknowledge.
G. Alarm messages shall be in plain English.
H. Alarm shall be sent to the Central Computer.
I.
Energy Log Information
J. Dynamic Color Graphic Displays
A. Create Site Layout Color graphic including building penetration Icons,
building floor plan displays with room temperatures and other building
sensors values dynamically displayed. Icon links on the floor plans will
allow penetration to the building Mechanical equipment. Provide System
graphics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling
units, chilled and hot water systems as applicable, with dispersed
dynamic data as indicated in the system point I/O summary of this
specification. Points required by the sequence of operations shall also be
displayed even if they are not defined by the I/O schedule to optimize
system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition. Provide as a
minimum the following graphics.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.7
Site layout
Building Floor plans
Individual AHU graphics
Central Energy Plant
AUXLLIARY CONTROL DEVICES
A.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL DAMPERS AND OPERATORS
1.
B.
AHU damper operators shall be spring return or capacitor charged return.
CURRENT SWITCHES
Provide a solid state switch which when the current level sensed by the internal current
transformer exceeds the adjustable trip point. Internal circuits are to be totally powered by
induction from the line being monitored. Provide a zero off-state leakage in the solid-state
relay output, while switching both AC and DC circuits.
C.
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES
Differential pressure switches shall be furnished as indicated by the sequence for status
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
purposes for either air or water applications. Provide single pole double throw switch with
fully adjustable differential pressure settings. The switch shall have a snap-acting Form C
contact rated for the application. The switch contact shall be rated for 5 amps at 120 volts
as a minimum. Units shall be selected for ranges consistent with the application and shall
be submitted for the Engineer’s approval.
D.
E.
ELECTRONIC TEMPERATURE SENSORS
1.
Temperature sensors shall be thermistors or 100 Ohm platinum RTD. Sensors
shall be calibrated to less than or equal to a 1/4 degree F resolution for the specific
application.
2.
Use insertion elements in ducts not affected by temperature stratification or
smaller than one square meter. Use averaging elements where larger or prone to
stratification. Sensor length 2.5 m or 5 m as required.
3.
Insertion elements for liquids shall be brass separable sockets (thermowells) with
minimum insertion length of 2-1/2 inches (60 mm).
4.
Provide outside air sensors with watertight inlet fittings, shielded from direct rays
of the sun.
5.
Wall mounted sensor shall be mounted at existing sensor locations.
6.
Strap on sensors shall not be used unless specifically required.
ELECTRONIC STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS
Static pressure sensors shall be differential pressure sensors, with the "high" output
sensing the duct pressure and the "low" input sensing atmospheric pressure.
The range for the static pressure sensor shall be matched to the static pressure of the
system being sensed, 0 to .5 inches, 0 to 2 inches, 0 to 5 inches, or 0 to 10 inches.
Accuracy shall be plus or minus 2% of the full range being sensed.
Q.
LOW TEMPERATURE LIMIT SENSORS
Provide low temperature protection thermostats of manual-reset type, with sensing
elements 8’-0” or 20’ in length. Provide thermostat designed to operate in response to
coldest 1’-0” length of sensing element, regardless of temperature at other parts of element.
Support element properly to cover entire duct width. Provide separate thermostats for
each 25 sq. ft. of coil face area or fraction thereof.
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
PART 3 - INSTALLATION
3.1
INSTALLATI0N
A. Install control systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, industry
standards, rough-in drawings, and detail drawings. Mount all control panels at convenient
locations and heights.
B. The control equipment and wiring shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner by the
trained mechanics.
C. Identify each item, mounted on the face of a control panel, with nameplate.
E. All thermostat bulbs in water lines shall be installed inseparable wells, packed with heat
conductive compound.
F. All controllers, relays, transducers, etc., required for stand-alone control shall be housed in
NEMA and UL listed enclosures with a lockable door.
I. Damper and valve shafts shall be permanently marked as to indicate damper position.
J. Install control valves in vertical position whenever possible, and in no case shall control valves
be installed below a horizontal position.
N. Number-code all conductors for future identification and service of control system. The
number coding of wiring conductors shall be as indicated in the wiring diagrams.
3.2
ELECTICAL WIRING
A. All wiring and conduit shall be run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure, and
shall be concealed in all finished spaces. All mechanical room wiring must be in conduit.
B. All electrical work performed in the installation of the BAS described in this specification shall
be per the National Electrical Code (NEC) and per applicable state and local codes. Circuits
operating at 100 volts or less shall be defined as low voltage. Use multi-conductor cable for
concealed accessible locations only where conductors are concealed in return air plenums,
cable rated for use in return air plenums shall be used. Plenum cable may be used without
conduit above lift out ceilings.
C. Provide twisted shielded cable for low voltage signal circuits installed in concealed, accessible
locations. Cable shall be listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories for its use and conductors shall
be minimum 18 gauge, with continuous shielding. All cables installed in air plenums or above
lift out ceilings shall be specifically listed for plenum use and may be run without conduit.
3.3
TRAINING
A. The Control Contractor shall provide two 8 hour training sessions. Each session shall be done
at the owner’s discretion.
PART 4 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
4.1
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
Variable Volume Air Handlers
AC-6A & 6B
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 11
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
The air handling unit shall be started and stopped via the start/stop schedule at the graphical hosts.
Unit shall run only when safeties are made. Safeties include fire alarm contact provided by fire alarm
contractor and manual reset low limit thermostat.
Fan start-stop control:
Each fan can be started from its "Hand-Off-Auto" switch. When the individual H-O-A switch is
placed in the manual position, the fan is started in the manual mode. When the H-O-A switch is placed in
the auto position, fans shall start upon an initiating start signal from the DDC controller. Fan shall run only
when safeties are made. Safeties include fire alarm contact provided by fire alarm contractor and manual
reset low limit thermostat. Schedule override shall be allowed from the operator workstation.
Fan Status:
The status of the supply fan shall be indicated through the use of current transformers on the fan
motor electrical leads to detect fan motor amperage. Abnormally low amperage, when fan operation is
called for, shall cause an alarm to be started.
Upon failure of start by any fan, the DDC shall send an alarm to the BMS.
Damper Controls:
When the HVAC system is shut down, unit dampers shall return to their normally open or closed
position:
Outside air damper: N.C. When unit is off, outdoor air dampers are closed. When unit starts,
during occupied periods the outside air damper shall open after proof of fan status, to a minimum position
as measured by the air flow measuring station in the outside air. During unoccupied periods, the outside air
damper shall be closed.
The outside and return air damper shall modulate to control the mixed air temperature when in
economizer mode.
Fan Control:
The air handling unit shall operate as a variable volume unit.
The DDC shall energize the variable speed drive for the supply fan and the air volume shall be
slowly increased to maintain the supply air static pressure setpoint. The manual reset high static pressure
sensors, located in the discharge of the supply fan, shall shut down the supply fan and initiate an alarm to
the DDC on high static pressure.
Cooling Control:
When not in economizer mode, the lead compressor shall be energized and run continuously. The
additional compressors shall be energized in stages to maintain a discharge setpoint of 55°F (adj.) subject
to fan status. During economizer mode, when outside air temperature is below 55°F (adj.), the compressors
shall be off.
Preheat Control:
A temperature sensor located in the discharge of the heating coil shall modulate the hot water
valve to maintain a discharge setpoint of 55°F (adj.). When the supply fan is off, the hot water valve shall
open to the coil.
Variable Volume Box Control:
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 12
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
Primary air valve shall be controlled by wall mounted temperature sensors. Valves shall regulate
the quantity of primary air as required to maintain the space temperature setpoint. Valve airflow shall be
monitored through the use of a calibrated airflow rate and to control the flow between the specified
maximum and minimum limits. The DDC Controller shall control the flow of air through the valve
independent of other special effects (pressure independent).
Upon a rise in space temperature above room cooling setpoint, the hot water reheat shall modulate
to satisfy the setpoint condition. The electric reheat shall be off unless the primary air valve is in the
minimum position. When the primary air valve is at the minimum position, the wall mounted temperature
sensor shall modulate the electric reheat to maintain space temperature setpoint.
Boiler Control
The lead boiler and lead hot water pump shall operate when the air handler is running. Lead/lag hot
water pump and boiler shall be rotated weekly.
Exhaust Fan
Exhaust fan shall run when associated air handler runs.
Constant Volume Air Handler
AC-M8
The air handling unit shall be started and stopped via the start/stop schedule at the graphical hosts.
Unit shall run only when safeties are made. Safeties include fire alarm contact provided by fire alarm
contractor and manual reset low limit thermostat.
Fan start-stop control:
Each fan can be started from its "Hand-Off-Auto" switch. When the individual H-O-A switch is
placed in the manual position, the fan is started in the manual mode. When the H-O-A switch is placed in
the auto position, fans shall start upon an initiating start signal from the DDC controller. Fan shall run only
when safeties are made. Safeties include fire alarm contact provided by fire alarm contractor and manual
reset low limit thermostat. Schedule override shall be allowed from the operator workstation.
Fan Status:
The status of the supply fan shall be indicated through the use of current transformers on the fan
motor electrical leads to detect fan motor amperage. Abnormally low amperage, when fan operation is
called for, shall cause an alarm to be started.
Upon failure of start by any fan, the DDC shall send an alarm to the BMS.
Damper Controls:
When the HVAC system is shut down, unit dampers shall return to their normally open or closed
position:
Outside air damper: N.C. When unit is off, outdoor air dampers are closed. When unit starts,
during occupied periods the outside air damper shall open after proof of fan status, to a minimum position
as measured by the air flow measuring station in the outside air. During unoccupied periods, the outside air
damper shall be closed.
The outside and return air damper shall modulate to control the mixed air temperature when in
economizer mode.
Cooling Control:
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 13
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
When not in economizer mode, the compressors shall be energized in stages to maintain space
temperature setpoint, subject to fan status. During economizer mode, when outside air temperature is below
55°F (adj.), the compressors shall be off.
Preheat Control:
A temperature sensor located in the discharge of the heating coil shall modulate the hot water
valve to maintain a discharge setpoint of 55°F (adj.). When the supply fan is off, the hot water valve shall
open to the coil.
100% OSA Air Handlers
DOAS-1
The air handling unit shall be started and stopped via the start/stop schedule at the graphical hosts.
Unit shall run only when safeties are made. Safeties include fire alarm contact provided by fire alarm
contractor and manual reset low limit thermostat.
Fan start-stop control:
Each fan can be started from its "Hand-Off-Auto" switch. When the individual H-O-A switch is
placed in the manual position, the fan is started in the manual mode. When the H-O-A switch is placed in
the auto position, fans shall start upon an initiating start signal from the DDC controller. Fan shall run only
when safeties are made. Safeties include fire alarm contact provided by fire alarm contractor and manual
reset low limit thermostat. Schedule override shall be allowed from the operator workstation.
Fan Status:
The status of the supply fan shall be indicated through the use of current transformers on the fan
motor electrical leads to detect fan motor amperage. Abnormally low amperage, when fan operation is
called for, shall cause an alarm to be started.
Upon failure of start by any fan, the DDC shall send an alarm to the BMS.
Damper Controls:
When the HVAC system is shut down, unit dampers shall return to their normally open or closed
position:
Outside air damper: N.C. When unit is off, outdoor air dampers are closed. When unit starts,
during occupied periods the outside air damper shall open after proof of fan status, to a minimum position
as measured by the air flow measuring station in the outside air. During unoccupied periods, the outside air
damper shall be closed.
The outside and return air damper shall modulate to control the mixed air temperature when in
economizer mode.
Cooling Control:
When not in economizer mode, the lead compressor shall be energized and run continuously. The
additional compressors shall be energized in stages to maintain a discharge setpoint of 55°F (adj.) subject
to fan status. During economizer mode, when outside air temperature is below 55°F (adj.), the compressors
shall be off.
Heat Control:
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 14
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
The hot gas reheat shall be modulated as the first stage of heating. The hot water valve shall be
modulated as needed as the second stage of heating. When the supply fan is off, the hot water valve shall
open to the coil.
PART 5 – INPUT/OUTPUT SUMMARY
5.1
INPUT/OUTPUT SUMMARY
Variable Volume Air Handlers
AC-6A (Typical for AC-6B & AC-M7)
Outputs
Inputs
Supply fan status
Supply fan start/stop
Outside air temperature
Outside/return air damper %
Filter status
Cooling stages
Supply air temperature
Heating control valve %
Leaving preheat temperature
Supply air static pressure
Outside air flow measuring
station
Mixed air temperature
VAV Boxes
Inputs
Space temperature
Space temperature setpoint
Air flow rate
Outputs
Air valve damper %
Heating control valve %
Hot Water System
Inputs
Boiler 1 status
Boiler 1 alarm
Boiler 2 status
Boiler 2 alarm
HWP-1 status
HWP-2 status
Outside air temperature
Outputs
Boiler 1 start/stop
Boiler 1 setpoint
Boiler 2 start/stop
Boiler 2 setpoint
HWP-1 start/stop
HWP-2 start/stop
100% OSA Units
DOAS-1
Inputs
Supply fan status
Outside air temperature
Outputs
Supply fan start/stop
Outside/return air damper %
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 15
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
Filter status
Supply air temperature
Leaving preheat temperature
Outside air flow measuring
station
Mixed air temperature
Outside air humidity
AC-M8
Inputs
Supply fan status
Outside air temperature
Filter status
Supply air temperature
Leaving preheat temperature
Outside air flow measuring
station
Mixed air temperature
Space temperature
Space temperature setpoint
Cooling stages
Heating control valve %
Outputs
Supply fan start/stop
Outside/return air damper %
Cooling stages
Heating control valve %
EX-L34 (Typical for ICX-L57, SFX-L57
Outputs
Inputs
Space temperature
Exhaust fan start/stop
Space temperature setpoint
Exhaust fan status
EX-L24 (Typical for EX-O6 & L23)
Inputs
Outputs
Exhaust fan status
Exhaust fan start/stop
ICX-L57 (Typical for ICX-L35, ICX-L30, L07, L13 & L57)
Inputs
Outputs
Exhaust fan status
Exhaust fan start/stop
WF-1
Inputs
Exhaust fan status
Outputs
Exhaust fan start/stop
END OF SECTION 230900
INSTRUMENTAL AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
230900 - 16
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.2
Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
Piping specialties.
Piping and tubing joining materials.
Valves.
Pressure regulators.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:
1.
2.
Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
Service Regulators: 65 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig or less.
C.
Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment,
including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Welding certificates.
B.
Field quality-control reports.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and maintenance data.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern.
Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket
welding.
Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends.
Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of
epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a.
2.2
Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
2.3
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller.
Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire
screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end
connection.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
B.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
2.4
Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with
AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are
prohibited.
MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A.
General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule"
Articles.
Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for
valves 1 inch and smaller.
Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) to NPS 2 (DN 50) shall have initials
"WOG" permanently marked on valve body.
One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
C.
BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded ends.
Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff
Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
Lee Brass Company.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
D.
Valve Boxes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.
Plug: Bronze.
Ends: Threaded, socket, as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve
Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated.
Pressure Class: 125 psig.
Listing: Valves NPS 1and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
Cast-iron, two-section box.
Top section with cover with "GAS" lettering.
Bottom section with base to fit over valve and barrel a minimum of 5 inches (125 mm) in
diameter.
Adjustable cast-iron extensions of length required for depth of bury.
Include tee-handle, steel operating wrench with socket end fitting valve nut or flat head,
and with stem of length required to operate valve.
PRESSURE REGULATORS
A.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Single stage and suitable for natural gas.
Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
Elevation compensator.
End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 and smaller.
Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Actaris.
American Meter Company.
Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process Management.
Invensys.
Maxitrol Company.
Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the
valve port.
Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum
pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator.
Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed
150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff.
Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator.
Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not
connected to vent piping.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.6
Canadian Meter Company Inc.
Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
Harper Wyman Co.
Maxitrol Company.
SCP, Inc.
Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.
Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and polyurethane paint finish.
Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent connection, if approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig.
DIELECTRIC UNIONS
A.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
Central Plastics Company.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
Jomar International Ltd.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
Description:
a.
b.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum at 180 deg F.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
c.
2.7
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for
marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick,
continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective
jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches
deep; colored yellow.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
B.
Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches below finished grade.
1.
C.
Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1.
2.
3.
D.
3.2
If natural-gas piping is installed less than 36 inches below finished grade, install it in
containment conduit.
Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by protective coating
manufacturer.
Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of
natural-gas piping.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss,
expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to
layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
C.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D.
Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
E.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
F.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
G.
Locate valves for easy access.
H.
Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.
I.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
J.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
L.
Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for
roughing-in requirements.
M.
Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including
service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install
where condensate is subject to freezing.
1.
Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped.
Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm)
long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove
plug or cap.
N.
Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure
protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.
O.
Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or
floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.
P.
Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side
down.
Q.
Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
R.
Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each
piece of equipment.
S.
Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.
T.
Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated
valve.
U.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
V.
3.3
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
HVAC Piping."
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install underground valves with valve boxes.
B.
Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate
for servicing and testing.
3.4
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Threaded Joints:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Welded Joints:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and
welding operators.
Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds
and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum
rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.6
NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment
grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.
C.
Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.
D.
Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within
72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and
appliances or equipment.
E.
Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as
practical to inlet of each appliance.
3.7
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" for piping and valve identification.
B.
Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade,
except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code
and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.9
OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Underground natural-gas piping shall be the following:
1.
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with
protective coating for steel piping.
B.
Aboveground natural-gas piping shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
C.
3.10
A.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be the following:
1.
.
2.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints.
C.
Containment Conduit: Steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints. Coat pipe and
fittings with protective coating for steel piping.
D.
Containment Conduit Vent Piping: Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded or
wrought-steel fittings with welded joints. Coat underground pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
3.11
UNDERGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Connections to Existing Gas Piping: Use valve and fitting assemblies made for tapping utility's
gas mains and listed by an NRTL.
B.
Underground: Bronze plug valves.
3.12
A.
ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE
Valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller at service meter shall be the following:
1.
2.
B.
Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
C.
One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
Bronze plug valve.
One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
Bronze plug valve.
Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
One-piece, bronze ball valve with bronze trim.
Bronze plug valve.
END OF SECTION 231123
FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
231123 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 232113 - HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and
specialties for the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
1.2
Hot-water heating piping.
Air-vent piping.
Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.
See Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic
piping.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Hot-Water Heating Piping: 200 psig at 200 deg F.
Air-Vent Piping: 200 deg.
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to
which it is attached.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
Pressure-seal fittings.
2.
Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for
calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.
3.
Air control devices.
4.
Hydronic specialties.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and maintenance data.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B.
Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.
C.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
D.
2.2
Anvil International, Inc.
S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products.
Victaulic Company.
Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze
casting.
Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed
fitting. Ductile-iron housing with keys matching pipe and fitting grooves, EPDM gasket
rated for minimum 230 deg F for use with housing, and steel bolts and nuts.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
b.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
B.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
D.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper
with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
E.
2.3
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating
nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined.
B.
Dielectric Unions:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
2.4
Capitol Manufacturing Company.
Central Plastics Company.
Hart Industries International, Inc.
Jomar International Ltd.
Matco-Norca, Inc.
McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Wilkins; a Zurn company.
Standard: ASSE 1079.
Pressure Rating: 250 psig.
End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
VALVES
A.
Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in
Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
B.
Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements
specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
C.
Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
Flow Design Inc.
Gerand Engineering Co.
Griswold Controls.
Taco.
Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company.
Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
D.
Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
Plug: Resin.
Seat: PTFE.
End Connections: Threaded or socket.
Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
E.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
Flow Design Inc.
Gerand Engineering Co.
Griswold Controls.
Taco.
Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or
venturi.
Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
Seat: PTFE.
End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
Diaphragm-Operated, Pressure-Reducing Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Body: Bronze or brass.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
Seat: Brass.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
Diaphragm: EPT.
Low inlet-pressure check valve.
Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
10.
F.
Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Selected to suit system in which installed,
with operating pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
Diaphragm-Operated Safety Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
G.
Body: Bronze or brass.
Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE.
Seat: Brass.
Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings.
Diaphragm: EPT.
Wetted, Internal Work Parts: Brass and rubber.
Inlet Strainer: removable without system shutdown.
Valve Seat and Stem: Noncorrosive.
Valve Size, Capacity, and Operating Pressure: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IV, and selected to suit system in which installed, with operating
pressure and capacity factory set and field adjustable.
Automatic Flow-Control Valves:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.5
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
Spence Engineering Company, Inc.
Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Flow Design Inc.
Griswold Controls.
Body: Brass or ferrous metal.
Piston and Spring Assembly: Stainless steel, tamper proof, self cleaning, and removable.
Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve.
Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate.
Size: Same as pipe in which installed.
Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus 5 percent over system pressure
fluctuations.
Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 deg F.
AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Manual Air Vents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
Body: Bronze.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
In-Line Air Separators:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
Taco.
Tank: One-piece cast iron with an integral weir constructed to decelerate system flow to
maximize air separation.
Maximum Working Pressure: Up to 175 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: Up to 300 deg F.
CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A.
2.7
Ethylene and Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmentalstabilizer additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol
solutions.
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Y-Pattern Strainers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.
End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and
larger.
Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
Stainless-Steel Bellow, Flexible Connectors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Body: Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing protective
jacket.
End Connections: Threaded or flanged to match equipment connected.
Performance: Capable of 3/4-inch misalignment.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
Expansion fittings are specified in Division 23 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for
HVAC Piping."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
1.
B.
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be the following:
1.
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
C.
Condensate-Drain Piping: Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and
soldered joints.
D.
Air-Vent Piping:
1.
2.
E.
3.2
Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic
piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.
Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.
Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining
methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-toplastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's
written instructions.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection
to each piece of equipment.
B.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves at each branch connection to return main.
C.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
J.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
K.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
L.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
M.
Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.
N.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
O.
Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to
the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
P.
Install valves according to Division 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
Q.
Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
R.
Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere
as indicated.
S.
Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, inline pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown
connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for
strainers smaller than NPS 2.
T.
Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
U.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
V.
3.4
Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with
requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 23 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for
HVAC Piping."
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and
Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for
maximum spacing of supports.
B.
Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
E.
3.5
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
Spring hangers to support vertical runs.
Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
H.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll
grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe
wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.
3.6
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
3.7
Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
B.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
C.
Install bypass piping with globe valve around control valve. If parallel control valves are
installed, only one bypass is required.
D.
Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according
to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum
yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping."
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
Prepare written report of testing.
Perform the following before operating the system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open manual valves fully.
Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.
Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,
cooling towers, to specified values.
Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
END OF SECTION 232113
HYDRONIC PIPING
232113 - 11
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.2
Rectangular ducts and fittings.
Round ducts and fittings.
Sheet metal materials.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,
and balancing requirements for metal ducts.
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, ductmounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" Retain one of three subparagraphs below if
retaining "SMACNA's 'Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems'" option
in paragraph above.
C.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
METAL DUCTS
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work.
Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings.
Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, and static-pressure classes.
233113 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Elevation of top of ducts.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
Fittings.
Reinforcement and spacing.
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and
panels.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration
isolation.
Sheet metal thicknesses.
Joint and seam construction and sealing.
Reinforcement details and spacing.
Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports.
Design Calculations: Calculations for selecting hangers and supports.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,
building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct
layout.
Suspended ceiling components.
Structural members to which duct will be attached.
Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction.
Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
B.
1.5
Lighting fixtures.
Air outlets and inlets.
Speakers.
Sprinklers.
Access panels.
Perimeter moldings.
Welding certificates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
C.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
D.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance:
Applicable requirements
Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
2.2
ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on
indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
METAL DUCTS
Lindab Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc.
Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.
233113 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
D.
2.3
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
Fabricate round ducts larger Than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal
seams.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct
construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
1.
D.
2.4
Galvanized Coating Designation: 60.
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum
ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Two-Part Tape Sealing System:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
C.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Tape:
Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified
acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight
seal.
Tape Width: 4 inches.
Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
Service: Indoor and outdoor.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Application Method: Brush on.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
Type: S.
Grade: NS.
Class: 25.
Use: O.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
F.
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be
rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot.
Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings
and fitting spigots.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized
rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.
C.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
D.
Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.
E.
Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.
F.
Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and
bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
G.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
H.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
2.
3.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.
Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc
chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and
Coordination Drawings.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2
inches.
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke
dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under
Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK
A.
Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.
B.
Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use
two-part tape sealing system.
C.
Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When
welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds,
and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.
D.
Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings,
hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.
E.
Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these
requirements.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.3
DUCT SEALING
A.
Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct
Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
B.
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
3.4
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.
Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class B.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal
Class A.
Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class C.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than2-Inch wg: Seal
Class B.
Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section
"Air Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.6
DUCT CLEANING
A.
Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
B.
Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1.
2.
D.
Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if
required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch
insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.
Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97
percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from
HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points
of entry into building.
Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
METAL DUCTS
Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).
Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply
and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive
assemblies.
Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section,
air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and
dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.
Coils and related components.
Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and
mechanical equipment rooms.
Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.
233113 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
7.
E.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.7
Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants
from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.
Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect
vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under
negative pressure.
Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without
damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.
Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner
to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated
or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.
Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational.
Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and
straighten fins.
Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.
Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if
fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written
instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.
START UP
A.
3.8
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC."
DUCT SCHEDULE
A.
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows:
B.
Supply Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units :
a.
b.
c.
2.
Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units :
a.
b.
c.
3.
Pressure Class: Positive 4-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
b.
METAL DUCTS
Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg .
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg>.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.
233113 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
c.
C.
Return Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units :
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Exhaust Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Pressure Class: Negative[1-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
c.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units :
a.
b.
c.
2.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
b.
c.
F.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 3-inch wg>.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12].
Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 12.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
b.
c.
D.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 6.
SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 11
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
G.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:
1)
2)
b.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:
1)
2)
3)
c.
3)
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments:
Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 31, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have
proportionately fewer segments.
1)
2)
METAL DUCTS
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
b.
c.
3.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1)
2)
2.
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments
for 90-degree elbow.
233113 - 12
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3)
4)
b.
c.
H.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.
1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.
Branch Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a.
b.
2.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.
Round: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees."
Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
c.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
END OF SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
233113 - 13
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 233116 - NONMETAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
PVC ducts and fittings.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,
and balancing requirements for nonmetal ducts.
Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for single- and double-wall, rectangular and round
ducts.
Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, duct-mounting access doors and
panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including duct closure, reinforcements, and hangers
and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards" and
performance requirements and design criteria indicated.
1.
B.
1.4
Static-Pressure Classes:
a.
Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg .
b.
Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1.
PVC duct materials.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components,
and attachments to other work.
Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes.
NONMETAL DUCTS
233116 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1.5
Elevation of top of ducts.
Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines.
Fittings.
Reinforcement and spacing.
Seam and joint construction.
Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions.
Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project.
Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration
isolation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:
1.
B.
1.6
Duct installation in congested spaces, indicating coordination with general construction,
building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct
layout.
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and
Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up."
B.
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance:
Applicable requirements
Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
C.
NFPA Compliance:
1.
2.
in
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PVC DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
General Plastics, Inc.
GPK Products, Inc.
Harvel Plastics, Inc.
Kroy Industries, Inc.
Northern Pipe Product Inc.; an Otter Tail company.
Plastinetics Inc.
Spears Manufacturing Company.
NONMETAL DUCTS
233116 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Duct and Fittings:
1.
2.
C.
Joining Materials: PVC solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564.
1.
2.
3.
D.
PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale
Environmental Chambers."
Fabrication:
1.
2.
E.
Round Duct: Comply with cell Classification 12454-B in ASTM D 1784, with external
loading properties of ASTM D 2412.
Round Fittings: Socket end molded of same material, pressure class, and joining method
as duct.
Fabricate joints, seams, transitions, reinforcement, elbows, branch connections, and
access doors and panels according to SMACNA's "Thermoplastic Duct (PVC)
Construction Manual," Chapter 3, "Standards of Construction for PVC Duct Systems."
Fabricate 90-degree rectangular mitered elbows to include turning vanes, 90-degree
round elbows with a minimum of three segments for 12 inches and smaller and a
minimum of five segments for 14 inches and larger.
Drains: PVC drain pockets with a minimum of NPS 1 threaded PVC pipe connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
B.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
C.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
D.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
E.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.
F.
Protect duct interiors from the moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials.
NONMETAL DUCTS
233116 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
G.
3.2
Install PVC ducts and fittings to comply with SMACNA's "Thermoplastic Duct (PVC)
Construction Manual."
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Install hangers and supports for PVC ducts and fittings to comply with SMACNA's
"Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual," Chapter 3, "Standards of Construction for
PVC Duct Systems."
B.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
C.
in Division 09 painting Sections.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Leakage Tests:
1.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report
for each test.
2.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing
and for compliance with test requirements.
Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section
being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum
system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating
pressure.
3.
4.
C.
Duct System Cleanliness Tests:
1.
2.
Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.
Test sections of nonmetal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness
according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of
HVAC Systems."
a.
Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media
shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D.
Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
E.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.4
DUCT CLEANING
A.
Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
NONMETAL DUCTS
233116 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
Use service openings for entry and inspection.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control:
1.
2.
3.5
Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if
required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch
duct as recommended by duct manufacturer. Comply with Division 23 Section "Air Duct
Accessories" for access panels and doors.
Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.
Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97
percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.
When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from
HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points
of entry into building.
START UP
A.
3.6
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing for HVAC."
DUCT SCHEDULE
A.
Underground Ducts:
1.
PVC Round Ducts and Fittings:
a.
Drain: Minimum NPS 1 PVC pipe with P-trap to air-gap drain.
END OF SECTION 233116
NONMETAL DUCTS
233116 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
1.2
Backdraft and pressure relief dampers.
Manual volume dampers.
Control dampers.
Fire dampers.
Smoke dampers.
Flange connectors.
Turning vanes.
Duct-mounted access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
Duct accessory hardware.
Related Requirements:
1.
Division 28 Section "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for duct-mounted fire and
smoke detectors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For duct accessories.
attachments to other work.
1.
Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction.
Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field
assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.3
Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
Special fittings.
Manual volume damper installations.
Control-damper installations.
Fire-damper and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted
access doors.
Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and maintenance data.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise
indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,
discolorations, and other imperfections.
2.2
MATERIALS
A.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: 60.
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
B.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.
C.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.3
BACKDRAFT AND PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Lloyd Industries, Inc.
Nailor Industries Inc.
NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
Pottorff.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
B.
Description: Gravity balanced.
C.
Maximum Air Velocity: 2000 fpm.
D.
Maximum System Pressure: 6-inch wg>.
E.
Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel, with welded corners or
mechanically attached and mounting flange.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
F.
Blades: Multiple single-piece blades, center pivoted, maximum 6-inch width, 0.050-inch- thick
aluminum sheet with sealed edges.
G.
Blade Action: Parallel.
H.
Blade Seals: Neoprene, mechanically locked
I.
Blade Axles:
1.
2.
Material: Galvanized steel.
Diameter: 0.20 inch.
J.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
K.
Return Spring: Adjustable tension.
L.
Bearings: Steel ball or synthetic pivot bushings]
M.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
Counterweights and spring-assist kits for vertical airflow installations.
Electric actuators.
Chain pulls.
Screen Mounting: Front mounted in sleeve.
a.
b.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.4
Sleeve Thickness: 20 gage minimum.
Sleeve Length: 6 inches minimum.
Screen Mounting: Rear mounted.
Screen Material: Aluminum.
Screen Type: Insect.
90-degree stops.
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
2.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Pottorff.
Ruskin Company.
Trox USA Inc.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
4.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
7.
B.
3.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Size: 0.5-inch diameter.
Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
Damper Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
2.5
Oil-impregnated bronze.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Jackshaft:
1.
2.
C.
Multiple or single blade.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
Bearings:
a.
b.
8.
Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
Mitered and welded corners.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
CONTROL DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Lloyd Industries, Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Metal Form Manufacturing, Inc.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
B.
Frames:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Bearings:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Multiple blade with maximum blade width of 6 inches.
Opposed-blade design.
Galvanized-steel.
0.064 inch thick single skin or 0.0747-inch- thick dual skin.
Blade Edging: Closed-cell neoprene.
Blade Edging: Inflatable seal blade edging, or replaceable rubber seals.
Blade Axles: 1/2-inch- diameter; galvanized steel; blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel
and brass; ends sealed against blade bearings.
1.
E.
Hat shaped.
0.094-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.
Mitered and welded corners.
Blades:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Nailor Industries Inc.
NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
Pottorff.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Young Regulator Company.
Oil-impregnated bronze.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of
damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Thrust bearings at each end of every blade.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Nailor Industries Inc.
NCA Manufacturing, Inc.
Pottorff.
Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
Ruskin Company.
Vent Products Company, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
12.
< If both types of dampers are required in "Type" Paragraph below, indicate location of
each on Drawings.
B.
Type: Dynamic; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C.
Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and minimum 2000-fpm> velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours.
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.034-inchthick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
2.
Minimum Thickness: 0.39 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit application.
Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.
G.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.034-inch-]hick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.034-inch- thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
K.
Heat-Responsive Device: replaceable link and switch package, factory installed, 165 deg F
rated.
2.7
FLANGE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors,
gaskets, and components.
C.
Material: Galvanized steel.
D.
Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.8
TURNING VANES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Elgen Manufacturing.
METALAIRE, Inc.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded
fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into
vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
D.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
E.
Vane Construction: Double]wall.
2.9
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
B.
Subject to compliance with requirementsprovide products by one of the
American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Elgen Manufacturing.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Nailor Industries Inc.
Pottorff.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
b.
2.10
A.
Double wall, rectangular.
Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
Vision panel.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Continuous and two sash locks.
DUCT ACCESS PANEL ASSEMBLIES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Flame Gard, Inc.
3M.
B.
Labeled according to UL 1978 by an NRTL.
C.
Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel.
D.
Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall.
E.
Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for
minimum 2000 deg F.
F.
Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
2.11
A.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Elgen Manufacturing.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
D.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to
two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick
aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
2.
3.
2.12
A.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.
Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
2.13
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, aluminum laminate and polyester film with latex
adhesive supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation;
aluminized]vapor-barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd..
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE
A.
Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap
and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to
suit duct-insulation thickness.
B.
Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline
and grease.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 9
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and
aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.
C.
Install backdraft dampers at outlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to
exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
1.
Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts.
E.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
F.
Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.
G.
Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. Provide labels at the ceiling grid for the
location of the dampers.
H.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
On both sides of duct coils.
Upstream and downstream from duct filters.
At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums.
At drain pans and seals.
Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and
equipment.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure
relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream
from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers.
At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.
Upstream or downstream from duct silencers.
Control devices requiring inspection.
Elsewhere as indicated.
I.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
J.
Access Door Sizes:
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 10
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
2.
3.
One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches.
Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches.
Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches.
K.
Label access doors according to Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
L.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
M.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible
duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
N.
Connect diffusers to ducts directly or]with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped
or strapped in place.
O.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with liquid adhesive plus tape.
P.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
Operate fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper
heat-response device is installed.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
Provide test report to architect of the operation of the fire and smoke damper that the
dampers function correctly.
END OF SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
233300 - 11
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 260000 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A.
1.2
1.3
The "General Conditions" and "Special Conditions" of Contract as written and referred to
hereinbefore are adopted and made part of Division 26.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Provide all materials, equipment, labor, etc., required to install complete working electrical system
as shown and specified.
B.
Provide fixed electrical equipment, except where specifically noted otherwise.
C.
Provide portable electrical equipment for complete system.
D.
Provide equipment and/or wiring normally furnished or required for complete electrical systems
but not specifically specified on the drawings or in specifications, as though specified by both.
E.
All equipment and wiring shall be new.
F.
Electrical work includes, but is not limited to:
1.
Arrange with local utility companies for services as shown or specified.
2.
Removal or relocation of electrical services located on or crossing through project
property, above or below grade, obstructing construction of project or conflicting with
completed project or any applicable code.
3.
Complete 600 volt Distribution System. Provide meters, switchboards, panelboards,
circuit breakers, power outlets, convenience outlets, switches, and/or other equipment
forming part of system.
4.
Connection of all appliances and equipment.
5.
Provide temporary facilities for construction power.
WORK NOT INCLUDED:
A.
Furring for conduit and equipment.
B.
Finish painting of conduit and equipment.
C.
Installation of motors except where specifically noted.
D.
Control wiring for mechanical systems, except where indicated to be provided by Electrical
Contractor.
E.
Installation of telephone instruments and wiring.
F.
Flashing of conduits into roofs and outside walls. Inform General Contractor of number and size
of roof penetrations prior to bidding.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26000-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A.
Classification of excavation: Architectural Division.
B.
Painting: Painting Division.
C.
Concrete Work: Concrete Division.
REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:
A.
Obtain and pay for all permits required for the work. Comply with all ordinances pertaining to
work described herein.
B.
Install work under this Division per drawings, specifications, latest edition of the National
Electrical Code, Local Building Codes, and any special codes having jurisdiction over specific
portions within complete installation. In event of conflict, install work per most stringent code
requirements determined by Architect (or) Engineer.
C.
Arrange, pay fees for and complete work to pass required tests by agencies having authority over
work. Deliver to Architect (or) Engineer Certificates of Inspection and approval issued by
authorities.
QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR:
A.
Has completed minimum two projects same size and scope in past five (5) years.
B.
This qualification applies to Sub-Contractors.
C.
Use workmen experienced in their respective trade. Submit qualifications of Superintendent for
review.
D.
Owner reserves right to reject bid of any Contractor failing to meet these qualifications.
GENERAL JOB REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Drawings and Specifications:
1.
Electrical work is shown on "E" series drawings inclusive. Follow any supplementary
drawings as though listed above.
2.
Drawings and specifications are complementary. Work called for by one is binding as if
called for by both.
3.
Drawings show general run of circuits and approximate location of equipment. Right is
reserved to change location of equipment and devices, and routing of conduits to a
reasonable extent, without extra cost to Owner.
4.
Refer conflicts between drawings and specifications describing electrical work and work
under other Divisions to Architect for remedial action.
5.
Use dimensions in figures in preference to scaled dimensions. Do not scale drawings for
exact sizes or locations.
6.
Execution of Contract is evidence that Contractor has examined all drawings and
specifications related to work, and is informed to extent and character of work. Later
claims for labor and materials required due to difficulties encountered, which could have
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26000-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
been foreseen had examination been made, will not be recognized.
7.
B.
Visit to Site:
1.
C.
D.
E.
Charges for extra work not allowed unless work authorized by written order from
Architect approving charge for work.
Visit site to survey existing conditions affecting work. Include necessary materials and
labor to accomplish the electrical work, including relocation of existing services and
utilities on building site in bid. No consideration given to future claims due to existing
conditions.
Definitions:
1.
Provide:
Furnish, install and connect complete.
2.
Wire:
Furnish all necessary wiring and connect complete.
3.
Install:
Set in place and wire complete.
4.
Work:
Materials completely installed and connected.
5.
AWG:
American Wire Gage.
6.
NEC:
National Electrical Code (latest edition)
7.
NFPA:
National Fire Protection Association.
8.
OSHA:
Occupation Safety and Health Administration.
9.
UL:
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
10.
NEMA:
National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
11.
IEEE:
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
Workmanship, Guarantee and Approval:
1.
Work under this Division shall be first class with emphasis on neatness and
workmanship.
2.
Install work using competent mechanics, under supervision of foreman, all duly certified
by local authorities. Installation subject to Architect's constant observation, final
approval, and acceptance. Architect (or) Engineer may reject unsuitable work.
3.
Furnish Architect written guarantee, stating that if workmanship and/or material executed
under this Division is proven defective within one (1) year after final acceptance, such
defects and other work damaged will be repaired and/or replaced.
4.
In event that project is occupied or systems placed in operation in several phases at
Owner's request, guarantee will begin on date each system or item of equipment is
accepted by Owner.
Observations of Work and Demonstration of Operation:
1.
At all observations of work, open panel covers, junction box covers, pull box covers,
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26000-3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
device covers, and other equipment with removable plates for check. Provide sufficient
personnel to expedite cover removal and replacement.
2.
F.
G.
Contractor to assist Architect (or) Engineer in demonstration of operation of new systems
to satisfaction of Owner. Contractor to have manufacturer available for demonstration of
systems where requested by Owner.
Materials and Substitutions:
1.
All material shall be new, with U.L. label where available. If U.L. label is not available,
material shall be manufactured in accordance with applicable NEMA; IEEE and Federal
Standards.
2.
No material shall be substituted for specified, except by prior written approval of
Architect (or) Engineer. Specified catalog numbers are used for description of equipment
and standard of quality only. Equivalent material given consideration only if adequate
comparison data including samples are provided. Approval required prior to bid date.
Bid substituted material only if approved in writing by Architect (or) Engineer.
3.
Submit to Architect (or) Engineer within 30 days after award of contract a complete list
of proposed material manufacturers. List does not preclude submission of shop drawings.
Approval of manufacturer on list does not constitute approval of specific material or
equipment.
Shop and Erection Drawings:
1.
Submit complete shop drawings for all material and equipment furnished under Division
16 of specifications, to Architect and Engineer for review within (30) days after award of
contract. Shop drawings shall be submitted on timely basis to allow adequate lead time
for review, re-submission if necessary, manufacture and delivery to allow access of
material to project at correct time based on schedule established by Architect (or)
Engineer/Contractor. Include complete descriptive data with dimensions, operating data
and weight for each item of equipment. Carefully examine shop drawings to assure
compliance with drawings and specifications prior to submittal to Architect. Shop
drawings and submittals shall bear the stamp of approval of the Electrical and General
Contractor as evidence drawings have been checked by them. Drawing submitted without
this stamp of approval will not be considered and will be returned for proper
resubmission.
2.
Drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11", submit 3 copies and 1 reproducible of each drawing.
Architect (or) Engineer will retain 2 copies and return 1 reproducible and 1 copy to
Contractor. Contractor is responsible for copying reproducible for distribution.
3.
8-1/2" x 11" drawing in brochure: Submit 6 original copies for review Architect (or)
Engineer will retain 2 copies and return 4 copies to Contractor.
4.
Review of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors and
omissions in shop drawings. Contractor is responsible for dimensions and sizes of
equipment. Inform Architect and Engineer in writing of equipment differing from that
shown.
5.
Prepare erection drawings when required by Engineer. Investigate thoroughly all
conditions affecting work and indicate on drawing. Architect (or) Engineer will review
erection drawings before work commences.
6.
Provide for Owner one (1) of final shop and erection drawings, except provide 1 set of
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26000-4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.5 mil Mylar sepias of shop drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" size.
7.
H.
I.
K.
a.
Electrical equipment rooms and areas.
b.
Electrical and mechanical equipment areas.
c.
Start drawings as HVAC shop drawings indicating all ductwork piping,
equipment and locations of mechanical room floor drains, and electrical
connections. Indicate elevations of all ductwork and piping. Draw sections as
required to clarify congested situations.
d.
Next, the Plumbing Section shall add all piping and plumbing equipment to the
drawings.
e.
Next, the Fire Protection Section shall add all sprinkler heads and fire protection
piping.
f.
Next, the Electrical Sections shall add all electrical fixtures, conduit and
equipment.
g.
Next, the drawings shall be submitted to the General Contractor for final
coordination.
h.
Finally, after the General Contractor has approved the drawings they shall be
submitted to the ![Architect (or) Engineer] for approval.
Cooperation:
1.
Carefully coordinate work with other contractors. Refer conflicts between trades to
Architect.
2.
Work to be installed as progress of project will allow. Schedule of work determined by
General Contractor and/or Architect.
Maintenance and Operating Instructions for Equipment:
1.
J.
Coordination shop drawings will be required for the following areas, drawn to a scale of
not smaller than 1/4" - 1'-0":
Submit to Architect one (1) set of data prepared by manufacturer for each item of
electrical equipment completely describing equipment. Data to include parts lists,
description of operation, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, maintenance procedures and
other literature required for maintenance of equipment. Bind in booklet form for
presentation.
Record Drawings:
1.
Contractor shall maintain at the site one (1) copy of the drawings in good order and
marked to record all changes made during construction.
2.
Contractor shall update all drawings to incorporate all changes and deliver one (1) set of
reproducible Mylar plans and one (1) electronic copy of the project in the latest
“AutoCAD” version to the Owner upon completion of the work.
Items for Owner:
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26000-5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.
L.
M.
a.
Certificates of inspection and approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
b.
Written guarantees.
c.
"Record" blue line prints.
d.
Final approved shop drawings (3 sets).
e.
Spare fuses (furnish receipt).
f.
Maintenance data (3 sets)].
g.
Affidavit of Owner Instruction (1 copy).
Marking:
1.
Identify each starter, (including starters furnished under Mechanical Section), panelboard,
cabinet, control device, breaker, disconnect and safety switch with 1/4" high black letters
cut in a white laminated phenolic strip. Use red letters for all equipment connected to
emergency system. Attach to enclosure with two (2) metal screws.
2.
Nameplates required for other items in this Division similar to those described above.
Protection and Storage:
1.
2.
N.
Provide following items for Owner at time of substantial completion:
Provide warning lights, bracing, shoring, rails, guards and covers necessary to prevent
damage or injury.
Do not leave exposed or unprotected, electrical items carrying current. Protect personnel
from exposure to contact with electricity.
3.
Protect work and materials from damage by weather, entrance of water or dirt. Cap
conduit during installation.
4.
Avoid damage to materials and equipment in place. Repair, or remove and replace
damaged work and materials.
5.
Exercise particular care when working around telephone (electronic) equipment to
prevent entrance of dust, moisture and debris into the equipment. Provide dust barriers
and partitions as required.
6.
Deliver equipment and materials to job site in original, unopened, labeled container.
Store to prevent damage and injury. Store ferrous materials to prevent rusting. Store
finished materials and equipment to prevent staining and discoloring. Store materials
affected by condensation in warm dry areas. Provide heaters. Storage space on site and in
building designated by Owner/![Architect (or) Engineer].
7.
Install equipment per manufacturer's recommendations. Conflicts between contract
documents and these recommendations, deferred to ![Architect (or) Engineer].
Excavation and Backfill:
1.
Excavate for work in this Division.
2.
Avoid existing facilities in excavating. Contractor is responsible for repair and
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26000-6
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
replacement of damaged facilities in executing work.
O.
3.
Backfill in twelve inch (12") lifts, wetted down and tamped. Compaction minimum 95%
of adjacent earth.
4.
Repairing to be comparable to work cut including new asphalt paving, concrete paving,
sod, replanting shrubbery, etc. Architect (or) Engineer will observe repair work, and
reject unsuitable work.
Cutting and Repairing:
1.
P.
Anchors:
1.
Q.
R.
1.
Clean equipment furnished in this Division after completion of work.
2.
Touch-up or re-paint damaged painted finishes.
3.
Remove debris, packing cartons, scrap, etc., from site.
Starters:
Separately mounted starters are furnished under another Division, but installed in
Division 26 unless specifically noted otherwise.
Control Wiring:
1.
T.
Provide anchors for all equipment, raceways, hangers, etc. to safely support weight of
item involved. Anchors to consist of expansion type devices similar to "Redhead" or lead
expansion anchors. Plastic anchors are not acceptable. Protect telephone equipment from
drilling residue.
Cleaning and Painting:
1.
S.
Cut and repair walls, floors, roof, etc., required to install work. Where work cut is
finished, employ original installer of finish to repair finish. Do not cut structural
members.
Control Wiring including low voltage and line voltage interlock wiring will be furnished
and installed under another Division, except where specifically shown otherwise.
Carefully coordinate power and control wiring interface.
"Contingency Items":
1.
Provide in electrical pricing the following components to consist of labor and materials
for complete installation:
a.
10
20 amp duplex receptacle and wall plate and 20 feet of 2#12 and
1#12(G)-1/2"C connected to circuit for power.
b.
5
20 amp three phase breaker furnished and installed in panel.
c.
6
Exit lights furnished and installed with box and 20 feet of conduit and
wiring.
d.
4
Two-head battery packs furnished and installed with mounting and 20
feet of conduit and wiring.
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26000-7
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.
U.
Unused components will be turned over to Owner for their attic stock.
Code Compliance:
1.
2.
Entire electrical installation shall comply with all aspects of code including local
interpretations. This includes but is not limited to:
a.
Installation adjustment to meet all code clearances between electrical such as
ductwork, other HVAC, plumbing, fire protection, and structural systems.
b.
Locations for items such as fire alarm appliances, exit lights, egress lighting,
disconnect switches, etc.
No additional compensation will be allowed for code compliance. Notify engineer of
difficulty encountered for assistance.
END OF SECTION 260000
ELECTRICAL GENERAL
26000-8
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 260011 – WORK IN EXISTING FACILITIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
DOCUMENTATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS:
A.
1.2
1.3
1.4
DEMOLITION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS:
A.
Demolish existing electrical work, including auxiliary systems, in areas of existing building shown
reworked. Coordinate removal of electrical systems with General Contractor and Owner.
B.
In reworked areas, remove all electrical equipment; i.e.: Light fixtures, panelboards, switches,
receptacles, auxiliary system devices, telephone outlets, etc; unless otherwise noted. Remove
existing branch circuits (conduit, wire, outlet boxes) serving equipment to be removed. Abandon
circuits concealed in concrete. Remove conductors from abandoned conduits. Leave existing
branch circuits and feeders which run through reworked areas and serve existing equipment to
remain in service, continuous and uninterrupted. Repair, re-terminate, re-support, etc., any
damaged circuits.
C.
Abandon outlets in existing masonry walls: Remove plaster frames, fill outlet box with grout and
patch finish to match existing wall. Cut off conduits at wall where stubbed-out in furred ceiling
space.
D.
Cut off conduits concealed in slab two inches below top of base floor slab and patch slab or floor
to match existing.
CUTTING AND REPAIRING:
A.
General Contractor shall do all cutting and repairing of walls, floors, roof, etc., required for
installation of work installed in this Division but shall back charge the Electrical Contractor for
this work. Advise General Contractor of amount and nature of cutting and repairing necessary to
install work prior to bid date.
B.
Repair work comparable with work cut. New finishes shall match adjacent finishes. Architect (or)
Engineer will approve repaired work and may reject unsuitable work.
CONTINUITY OF SERVICE:
A.
1.5
Before new work begins, the Contractor shall determine and document in writing to the Architect
the condition of existing electrical work and auxiliary systems remain in service. After new work
begins, existing electrical work or systems found to be inoperative or defective and documented
shall be repaired or replaced by Contractor at no addition cost to the Owner.
Provide continuous, uninterrupted electrical service to existing outlets, apparatus, and equipment
in existing building. Provide temporary wiring installed in safe, approved manner to equipment
and outlets as required. Where service interruptions are required, obtain approval for interruption
in writing from Owner 10 days prior to interruption. Include schedule of work to be performed and
time required to accomplish work in request for interruption. Work during service interruptions
may occur after normal working hours. Include premium (overtime) time labor in bid.
WORK IN RESTRICTED AREAS:
A.
Work in areas normally restricted to public will be done at the convenience of the Owner. Most
work will occur after normal working hours. Include premium (overtime) labor in bid. Coordinate
access areas with Owner and Architect prior to scheduling work.
WORK IN EXISTING FACILITY
260011-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.6
USE OF EXISTING A.C. OUTLETS:
A.
1.7
It is imperative only AC outlets located in building walls and columns be used for electrical tools,
cleaning equipment, etc. AC outlets installed for telephone or electronic equipment to be used for
that equipment only.
SALVAGE:
A.
Electrical equipment, wiring, etc., removed and not required to be part of new electrical
installation is classed as salvage.
B.
Salvageable equipment becomes property of Contractor. Remove from job site.
END OF SECTION 260011
WORK IN EXISTING FACILITY
260011-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 260012 - ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
DESCRIPTION OF SUBMITTAL CATEGORIES:
A.
Submittals required are defined below and specified in each section.
B.
Shop Drawings include fabrication, layout, wiring diagrams, erection, setting,
coordination, similar drawings and diagrams and performance data.
C.
Samples are units of work, materials or equipment items, showing the workmanship,
pattern, trim and similar qualities proposed.
D.
Manufacturer's Data is standard printed product information concerning the standard
portions of the manufacturer's products.
E.
Certifications are written statements, executed specifically for the project application by
an authorized officer of the contracting firm, manufacturer or other firm as designated,
certifying to compliance with the specified requirements.
F.
Test Reports are specific reports prepared by independent testing laboratories, showing
the results of specified testing. Industry Standards are printed copies of the current
standards in the industry.
G.
Manufacturer's Product Warranties are manufacturer's standard printed commitment in
reference to a specific product and normal application, stating that certain acts of
restitution will be performed by the manufacturer if the product fails under certain
conditions and times limits.
H.
Operating Instructions are the written instructions by the manufacturer, fabricator or
installer of equipment or systems, detailing the procedures to be followed by the Owner
in operation, control and shut-down.
I.
Maintenance Manuals are the compiled information provided for the Owner's
maintenance of each system of operating equipment. Maintenance Materials are extra
stock of parts or materials for the Owner's initial use in maintaining the equipment and
systems in operation.
J.
Guarantees are signed commitments to the Owner that certain acts of restitution will be
performed if certain portions of work fail within certain conditions and time limits.
K.
Product Data includes manufacturer's data pertaining to the products, materials and
equipment of the work.
SUBMITTAL FORM AND PROCEDURES:
A.
Submittals shall be made within 30 days of contract signing for projects of 12 months
construction time or less. Make within 60 days for longer then 12 months construction
time.
ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
26012-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
1.3
B.
Submit shop drawings for all material and equipment furnished under Division 26 to
Architect.
C.
Multiple System Items: Where a required submittal relates to an operational item of
equipment used in more than one system, increase the number of copies as necessary to
complete maintenance manuals for each system.
D.
Response to Submittals: Submittals will be returned with indication that documents
comply with specifications or that documents do not comply and what action must be
taken to be in compliance.
E.
Coordinate electrical submittals through Contractor to Architect and assist Contractor in
preparation of submittal.
F.
Submittals shall bear the stamp and signature of electrical and general contractor. Failure
to place same on drawings require resubmittal before review.
SPECIFIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:
A.
Shop Drawings:
1.
To accurate scale except where diagrammatic representations are specifically
indicated.
2.
To show clearance dimensions of critical locations and show dimensions of
spaces required for operation and maintenance of equipment.
3.
To show conduit and conductor connections and other service connections.
4.
To show interfaces with other work including structural support.
5.
To include complete descriptive data, with dimensions, operating data and
weight.
6.
To indicate deviation from the contract documents.
7.
To explain deviations.
8.
To show how deviations coordinate with portions of the work, currently or
previously submitted.
B.
Review of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or
omissions in shop drawings. Any equipment which will not fit into space shown on
drawings shall be called to the attention of the Architect (or) Engineer in writing.
C.
Samples: Architect's (or) Engineer review of sample submittals:
1.
Limited to general type, pattern and finish.
2.
Not to include testing and inspection of the submitted samples.
ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
26012-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.
D.
E.
Compliance with specified requirements is exclusive responsibility of the
Contractor.
Manufacturer's Data:
1.
Where pre-printed data covers more than one distinct item, mark copy to indicate
which item is to be provided.
2.
Delete portions of data not applicable.
3.
Mark data showing portion of operating range required for project application.
4.
Elaboration of standard data describing a non-standard product processed as a
shop drawing.
For each product include:
1.
Manufacturer's production specifications.
2.
Installation or fabrication instructions.
3.
Source of supply.
4.
Sizes, weights, speeds and operating capacities.
5.
Conduit and wire connection sizes and locations.
6.
Statements of compliance with required standard and governing regulations.
7.
Performance data, where applicable.
8.
Other information needed to confirm compliance. Manufacturer's recommended
parts list.
F.
Certifications: Submit with notarized execution.
G.
Test Reports: Submit notarized test reports signed and dated by firm performing test.
H.
Manufacturer's Product Warranties: Where published warranty includes deviation from
required warranty, product is disqualified from use on project, unless manufacturer issues
a specific project warranty.
I.
Operating Instructions submittal required:
1.
Manufacturer's operating instructions for each item of electrical equipment.
2.
Supplement with additional project application instructions where necessary.
3.
Specific operating instructions for each electrical system which involves multiple
items of equipment. Instructions for charging, start-up, control or sequencing of
operation, phase or seasonal variations, shut-down, safety and similar operations.
ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
26012-3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
4.
J.
Typewritten in completely explained and easily understood English language.
Maintenance Manual Requirements:
1.
Emergency instructions including addresses and telephone numbers for service
sources.
2.
Regular system maintenance procedures.
3.
Proper use of tools and accessories.
4.
Wiring and control diagram for each system.
5.
Manufacturer's data for each operational item in each system.
6.
Manufacturer's product warranties and guarantees relating to the system and
equipment items in the system.
7.
Shop drawings relating to the system.
8.
Bind each maintenance manual in one or more vinyl-covered, 2", 3-ring binders,
plus pocket-folders for folded drawings. Index with thumb tab for sections. Mark
the back spine and front cover of each binder with system identification and
volume number.
K.
Maintenance Materials: Deliver to Owner in fully identified containers or packages
suitable for storage.
L.
Guarantees: Where indicated as "Certified", provide guarantee which, in addition to
execution by an authorized officer of each guarantor, is attested to by the Secretary of
each guarantor and bears the corporate seal. Submit draft of each guarantee prior to
execution.
END OF SECTION 260012
ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS
26012-4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 260014 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Systems and equipment requiring identification are shown on the drawings, and extent of
identification is specified herein and in individual sections of work.
B.
Types of electrical identification include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.2
Exposed conduit color marking.
Buried cable and conduit warnings.
Cable/conductor identification.
Operational instructions and warnings.
Danger signs.
Equipment/system identification signs (nameplates).
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Manufacturer's Data:
1.
B.
Product specifications and installation instructions for each material and device.
Samples:
1.
Provide for each color, lettering style and other graphic representation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIAL:
A.
Color-Coded Conduit Markers:
1.
Color code all conduit with 3/4 inch wide band of vinyl plastic electrical tape, 3M
Company “Scotch 35", applied two (2) full turns around conduit, 6" from all conduit
terminations into switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers, starters, cabinets,
control panels, pullboxes, outlet boxes, etc., on each side of walls, floors or roof
penetrated by conduit and where conduit enters wall to outlets below:
CONDUIT COLOR CODE
SYSTEM
120/208 Volts - Normal
277/480 Volts - Normal
Fire Alarm
B.
Where authority does not allow tape use paint acceptable to authority.
C.
Underground Plastic Line Marker:
1.
COLOR
Black
Yellow
Red
Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed metallic core or
metallic-faced, acid-and alkali- resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape, for directburial service; minimum 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Printing to indicate type service of
cable.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26014-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
D.
Cable/Conductor Identification Bands:
1.
E.
F.
Self-Adhesive Plastic Signs:
1.
Manufacturer's standard, self-adhesive, pre-printed, flexible vinyl signs for operational
instructions or warnings. Sizes suitable for application and visibility, with proper
wording for application.
2.
Color: Orange with black lettering.
Danger Signs:
1.
G.
H.
Manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor markers, wrap-around
type; pre-numbered plastic coated, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover
flap, lettered to show circuit identification.
Manufacturer's standard "DANGER" signs, baked enamel finish on 20 gage steel;
standard red, black and white graphics; 14" x 10" unless 10" x 7" is largest which can be
applied, or where larger size is needed for visibility use recognized explanation wording
(as examples: HIGH VOLTAGE, KEEP AWAY, BURIED CABLE, DO NOT TOUCH
SWITCH).
Engraved Signs (Nameplates)
1.
1/8" thick melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS LP-387, sizes as indicated,
engrave with standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated (1/4" letters minimum)
white field, black letters for normal service; red field, white letters for essential service;
yellow field, blue letters for D.C. service; orange field, white letters for UPS service.
Punched for screws.
2.
Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact epoxy adhesive where
screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.
Lettering and Graphics:
1.
Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used with those shown or
specified. Provide numbers, lettering, and wording as indicated or required for
identification and operation/maintenance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION:
A.
B.
General Installation Requirements:
1.
After completion of painting.
2.
Comply with governing regulations and requests of governing authorities for
identification of electrical work.
Conduit Identification:
1.
Where high voltage conduit is exposed, apply identification to conduit.
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26014-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
D.
Underground Cable Identification:
1.
During back-filling of underground cable, install continuous marker, directly over buried
line 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple lines are buried in common trench not
exceeding 24" width, install a single line marker.
2.
Install line marker for every buried ductbank.
Operational Identification and Warnings:
1.
E.
F.
Provide operational signs for main switch.
Danger Signs:
1.
Provide for 5 KV to 35 KV medium voltage switchgear, sectionalizer loop switches, etc.,
as shown and described herein.
2.
Provide as required by codes.
Engraved Plastic Laminated Signs: Install on each major unit of electrical equipment in the
building. Provide single line of text, 1/4" high lettering on 1" high sign (1-1/2" high where 2 lines
required). Matching terminology and numbering of contract documents. Provide signs for each
unit of the following categories (signs shall identify item fed, voltage where fed from):
1.
Electrical cabinets and enclosures. Indicate voltage.
2.
Major electrical switchgear (indicate voltage).
3.
Safety switches and circuit breakers.
4.
Transformers.
5.
Feeders in pull and junction boxes and in all switchgear. Fasten with nylon ties.
6.
All equipment furnished in this Division of the specifications.
7.
Install signs where indicated or most visible. Secure with screws or epoxy adhesive.
Secure to feeder cables with nylon ties.
8.
Nameplate sign shall include system voltage and source of feed (where applicable).
G.
Outlet pull, and junction boxes shall be identified with circuit number(s), and source panel or
switchgear/switchboard indicated with legible text written with permanent black marker. Write
text and box cover.
H.
Branch circuit and feeder conductors shall be identified where they enter pullboxes, switchgear,
switchboards, panelboards, transformers, and handholes. Feeder identification shall include
source, conductor size, and phase identification.
I.
Provide engraved device plates for wiring devices where indicated on drawings or related sections
of the specifications.
1.
Use black letters for devices on normal circuits; use red letters for essential circuits.
END OF SECTION 260014
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
26014-3
Coordination
SECTION 260030 – COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
DRAWINGS FOR MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, FIRE PROTECTION AND ELECTRICAL WORK
A.
Drawings contain diagrammatic layouts and indicate general arrangement of systems, piping
conduit, etc.
B.
Prior to installation of material and equipment, review and coordinate work with Architectural and
Structural Drawings and other Division work for exact space conditions; where not readily
discernable request information from Architect before proceeding.
C.
Check Drawings of all other trades to verify extent of material and equipment to be installed in
spaces available and consider layout alternatives so that all requirements can be accommodated.
D.
Maintain maximum headroom at all locations without finished ceilings.
E.
Maintain finished ceiling heights as indicated on Architectural reflected ceiling plans, and building
sections and elevation drawings.
F.
Coordinate installations with other trades prior to proceeding to prevent conflict with work of
other trades and cooperate in making reasonable modifications in layout as needed.
G.
Where conflicts occur with placement of mechanical and electrical materials as they relate to
placement of other building materials, the Architect shall be consulted for assistance in
coordination of the available space to accommodate all trades.
H.
Coordinate equipment installation to maintain manufacturer and code required working
clearances.
PRIORITY OF CONSTRUCTION SPACE
A.
Following is the Order of Priority for Construction Space:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
First: Ductwork.
Second: Fire protection piping.
Third: Other piping.
Fourth: Conduit.
COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A.
The Contractor shall prepare a complete set of "Cronoflex Mylar" type background drawings at
scale of minimum 1/4" equals 1'-0".
1.
The construction documents in their original, copies or electronic file form are the
Architect's instrument of service and are protected under copyright laws. The
reproduction of these documents for use as coordination drawings or shop drawings is
prohibited without the Architect's written consent and authorization.
B.
Each specialty trade listed below shall prepare a coordination Mylar overlay indicating his work,
with appropriate elevations and grid dimensions.
C.
Each specialty trade shall sign and date the coordination Drawing after the addition of his
information.
COORDINATION
26030-1
Coordination
D.
Fabrication shall not start until receipt of completed coordination drawings is acknowledged by
the Contractor in writing to the Architect.
E.
Specialty Trades:
1.
Ductwork
2.
Fire protection piping
3.
Other piping
4.
Electrical
5.
Plumbing piping to include but not limited to sanitary, vent, pressure storm, medical gas
(if provided), compressed air, natural gas, etc.
F.
Coordination Drawings required for all mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, equipment rooms,
corridors, horizontal exits from duct shafts, cross-overs and any other areas where congestion of
work may occur.
G.
Coordination Schedule Drawing:
1.
The mechanical and plumbing contractor shall furnish to electrical contractor for
coordination a schedule drawing providing all the electrical characteristics of all
mechanical and plumbing equipment requiring electrical connection. The information
provided shall include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
2.
The coordination schedule drawing, once received by the electrical contractor, shall be
reviewed and all pertinent electrical accommodations indicated.
a.
b.
c.
3.
H.
Unit Designation
Voltage
MCA
MOCP/MFS
FLA
Disconnect Requirement
Starter Requirement
Alarm Wiring Requirements
Breaker size.
Wire size / conduit size.
Disconnect with fuse size.
Once the coordination schedule is completed forward to the engineers for review and
approval.
Conflicts that arise due to the fact that the coordination schedule drawing was not completed shall
be the sole responsibility of the contractors. All costs for correction or remedial work shall be
done at the contractor’s expense. No added cost to the owner will be allowed.
END OF SECTION 260030
COORDINATION
26030-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 260519 - CONDUCTORS (Low Voltage, 600 Volts)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Furnishing, installing and testing 600 volt conductors for lighting, power, and auxiliary systems.
B.
Furnishing, installing and testing 600 volt conductors for 2 hour fire rating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CONDUCTORS:
A.
98% conductivity copper; #12 AWG minimum; #10 AWG and smaller solid, #8 and larger
stranded.
B.
Conductors furnished with NEC, 600 volt, insulation as follows:
1.
2.
Dry locations:
a.
# 6 AWG and smaller: type THW, THHN, THWN or XHHW (do not intermix
in circuits)
b.
# 4 AWG and larger: type THW, THHN, THWN or XHHW, (cross linked
polyethylene)]
Wet locations: type RHH-RHW-USE
C.
Ungrounded System Wiring: All wiring connected to the secondary side of isolating transformers:
Cross-linked polyethylene insulation with dielectric constant of less than 3.5; 30 mills minimum
thickness, resistance constant greater than 20,000 at 60 degrees F, shall be suitable for wet and dry
locations. Cable - G.E. No. SI-58053 or approved equivalent.
D.
Color Code as follows and/or per local ordinances. Conductors #10 and smaller with colored
insulation. Conductors #8 and larger not available in colors, color coded with colored pressure
sensitive tape. Apply minimum 2" of tape to each individual conductor in half lapped pattern.
Color-code as follows:
E.
Phase
120/240 Volts
120/208 Volts
277/480 Volts
Ungrounded
A
Black
Black
Yellow
Orange
B
Red
Red
Orange
Brown
C
Orange
Blue
Brown
Yellow
Neutral
White
White
White
White
Eq Grnd
Green
Green
Green
Green
Manufacturers of copper conductors: Phelps Dodge, Capital Cable, Southwire, Senator, United
Copper, Cero Wire & Cable, American, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
CONDUCTORS
Install wiring complete with connections to equipment.
260519-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
B.
No wiring installed until after plastering and similar work is complete and dry.
C.
Install wiring so conductors are not in tension in completed system.
D.
Form wiring neatly and group in circuits. Tie grouped conductors with nylon ties, T&B "Tyrap" or
approved equal.
E.
Use pulling compound of Ideal "Yellow 77", Minerallac No. 100, or approved equal. Do not use
pulling compound for circuits on secondary side of ungrounded isolation transformers.
F.
Join and terminate copper conductors individually.
1.
Lugs connected to copper bus: 98% conductivity copper or bronze Thomas & Betts
"Locktite", Burndy "QA" or approved equivalent.
2.
Lugs connected to copper bus: Solid 98% conductivity long copper barrel, tin plated,
compression type connectors, Thomas & Betts color keyed, Burndy "Hydent" or
approved equal; applied with appropriate hydraulic tool.
3.
Lugs in dry locations and lugs connected to aluminum bus - heavy casting aluminum,
CU/AL rated, listed under UL Standard 486B, rated 90 degrees C; plated to prevent
electrolysis, Thomas & Betts, Blackburn, Ilsco or approved equivalent.
G.
Provide lugs where not furnished as part of equipment -furnish as specified above, to connect all
conductors.
H.
Furnish lugs for conductors #2/0 and larger with two bolt tongue or approved equivalent.
I.
Make conductor taps #8 and larger from a second conductor with 98% conductivity bolted
insulated connector, T&B "IDT", Ilsco "KUP-L-TAP" or approved equivalent. Insulate splices
with 600 volt "heat shrink" covers T&B or equal.
J.
Splice conductors #8 and larger with solid copper barrel, type fittings applied with an appropriate
hydraulic tool. Splices used only where approved. Splice fittings: Burndy "Hydent". Insulate
splices with 600 volt "heat shrink" covers T&B or equal.
K.
Joints #10 and smaller: T&B Sta-Kon wire joints EPT66M, with insulating caps, installed with
WT161 Tool or C nest of WT11M Tool; Ideal Super/Nuts; Ideal Wing Nuts; 3M "Scotchlock" or
Buchanan Electric Products B Cap or Series 2000 Pressure connectors complete with nylon snap
on insulators installed with C24 pressure tool. Where conductors are connected to screw terminals,
use nylon insulated, locking fork, T&B Sta-Kon or approved equal. Where joints are made in
damp or wet locations insulate splices with 600 volt “heat shrink” covers T&B or equal.
L.
Provide cable supports: As required by NEC. Supports with malleable screwed conduit fitting and
non-conductive wedges drilled for the conductors; O.Z. Manufacturing Company or approved
equal. Furnish pullbox, sized per NEC for each cable support.
M.
Bond circuit ground wires where installed to all devices, equipment, outlet and junction boxes, and
grounding bushings (where provided) with a full size conductor and screw type connection.
N.
Securely fasten non-ferrous identifying tapes, pressure sensitive labels or engraved nameplates to
all cables, feeders and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, manholes, switchboard rooms,
terminations of cables, etc.
CONDUCTORS
260519-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
O.
Mark all branch circuit conductors at panel terminations including neutrals with pressure sensitive
numbers to correspond to circuit numbers connected.
P.
Connect circuits and feeders as shown on drawings. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show
every detail required in the wiring system. Detail wiring accomplished per NEC.
Q.
All conductors making up parallel feeders to be same size, same type, and same insulation, all cut
same length. Bond each group of conductors making up a phase or neutral at both ends in an
approved manner.
R.
DO NOT COMBINE CIRCUITS unless specifically approved by the Engineer. No more than 3
phase or current carrying conductors in a circuit.
END OF SECTION 260519
CONDUCTORS
260519-3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 260526 – GROUNDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE OF WORK:
A.
Grounding Details
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SYSTEM GROUNDING:
A.
Bond and ground main service neutral, cabinets, equipment, conduits, metallic piping systems,
etc., per the latest edition of NEC.
B.
Ground conductors - 98% conductivity copper, either bare or with green THW insulation. Other
conductor requirements same as described for low voltage, 600 volts, conductors.
C.
Ground Connections:
D.
2.2
1.
Make with mechanical connectors where accessible and with "Cadweld" or approved
equivalent where inaccessible.
2.
Use high alloy cast copper and/or silicon bronze mechanical connectors with Hex or
Allen head bolts where permitted.
3.
Use Burndy "GAR” or approved equivalent.
4.
Size as required for piping connections.
5.
Thoroughly clean prior to installation of clamps and/or lugs.
6.
Use bolted or screwed on mechanical connectors. Do not use clip-on connections.
7.
Bond ground conductor to metal raceway at each end of the run.
8.
Seal connections between dissimilar metals (i.e.: bronze to steel), with approved epoxy
resin.
9.
Coat connections with "No-OXID-A" compound as manufactured by Dearborn Chemical
Company.
Provide lighting and power circuits with green covered ground wire sized per NEC, or as shown,
except not smaller than #12 AWG. Bond ground wire to all outlet boxes, junction and pull boxes,
cabinets, equipment, etc., with self-tapping screw or bolt and appropriate lug. See Section
covering "Raceways" for use of grounding bushing.
DRIVEN GROUND SYSTEM:
A.
Provide driven ground rods and buried ground conductor interconnecting ground rods as shown on
drawings and required by code.
B.
Ground rods 3/4"x10'-0" copper clad steel, Thompson #558 or approved equal. Ground rods
installed with tops driven to 1'-6" minimum below grade. Connect ground wire to ground rod with
Cadweld or equal.
GROUNDING
260526-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
Exterior buried ground conductor #2/0, soft drawn, bare, tinned copper, installed 2'-0" minimum
below grade.
D.
Bond all masses of metal, i.e.: pipes, conduits, fence posts, etc., within 6'-0" of the buried ground
conductor to ground conductor with #6 AWG bare, solid, tinned copper wire, attached to object
with appropriate clamp, lug, etc., (Cadweld or equal). Obtain complete set of drawings to
determine quantity and location of required connections.
E.
All connectors lugs, hardware, etc., for building ground system similar to that for other grounding
as described above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT GROUND 'GREEN WIRE CONCEPT':
A.
Ground electrical equipment enclosures and conductor enclosures including metal raceways, outlet
boxes, cabinets, switch boxes, motor frames, diesel engine frame, transformer cases, metallic
piping systems such as water, gas, waste, air and metallic enclosures for all electrical equipment.
B.
Provide separate grounding conductor for all circuits to insure adequate ground fault return path.
C.
Install separate ground conductors in conduit.
D.
Bond green wire to equipment enclosure at source and at apparatus served.
E.
Insulate grounding conductors size to carry ground fault current safely. Minimum size for green
wire grounding lead per N.E.C. or as indicated.
F.
Do not use grounded current return conductors (neutrals) for equipment grounding. Connect
common grounding lead to supply side of service disconnect unit only.
G.
Do not ground neutral conductor after it has been grounded at service entrance, transformer or
generator.
H.
Maintain electrical continuity of conduit systems by threaded fittings with joints made-up wrench
tight. Install insulated bushing and locknuts on terminating conduits. Provide conduits containing
ground wires with grounding bushings bonded to ground wire with short full size jumper.
I.
Provide receptacles with approved green covered bonding jumper from the grounding terminal
screw connected to outlet box.
J.
Install ground rods in quantity to provide a maximum of 5 ohms ground resistance. Where
multiple rods required, separate a minimum of 6 feet and interconnect with wire of ground size
shown.
K.
Test ground systems as specified in Section 16010.
L.
Install tags on ground connections to piping or electrode systems for all telephone equipment
grounds.
END OF SECTION 260526
GROUNDING
260526-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Installation of raceway systems for all work in Division 26 and required fittings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metallic Raceways:
1.
Republic
2.
Wheatland
3.
Allied
4.
Clifton
5.
Triangle
6.
Walker
7.
Western
8.
AFC
B.
Fittings
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Thomas & Betts
Hubbell: RACO; Killark
Appleton
Midwest
EFCOR
OZ Gedney
Bridgeport
AFC
RACEWAYS
A.
B.
Rigid galvanized steel conduit to conform to ASA Standard C80.1 and U.L. Standard No. 6 for
rigid metallic conduit, except hot dipped galvanized after threading.
1.
Fittings, ells, couplings, etc., galvanized threaded type meeting above standards.
Threadless fittings not allowed.
2.
Terminate rigid conduit with two locknuts, one inside, one outside of the cabinet,
junction or outlet and a bushing. Bushing - malleable iron with smooth bakelite ring
molded into edge of bushing to prevent damage to cable, OZ Mfg. Co., type "B" or
approved equal. Where grounding bushings are required, construction of
bushing
similar to above except a lug provided for grounding connection, OZ type "BLG" or
approved equal.
Rigid intermediate grade conduit, IMC, to conform to UL Standard No.1242; hot dipped
galvanized or approved equivalent.
1.
CONDUCTORS
All fittings, ells, couplings, etc., constructed to same standards as rigid steel conduit.
Fittings - threaded type with all threads engaged. Use "Uni-swivel" couplings in dry
locations only.
260533-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
2.
C.
Flexible steel conduit, "Greenfield", continuous spirally wound and inter-locked, threadless,
galvanized conforming to U.L. and CSA Standards for flexible steel conduit.
1.
D.
Connectors and fittings galvanized steel, threadless type with insulated throats, U.L.
approved for grounding means.
Liquid tight flexible steel conduit constructed similar to flexible steel conduit above, except with
polyvinyl chloride jacket.
1.
E.
Conduit terminations same as rigid steel conduit.
Fitting Assembly - sealing type, with steel gland, nylon ring and ground cone inside
locknut. All fittings with insulated throat, U.L. approved for grounding means.
Electrical metallic tubing, EMT, threadless, steel type conforming to ASA Standard C80.3
galvanized inside and out, and with additional corrosion resistant finish.
1.
Fittings, connectors, couplings, etc., insulated throat galvanized steel compression type
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION:
A.
Install conduit as follows:
1.
Use rigid steel or intermediate grade conduit for:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
Circuits run underground.
Circuits run in concrete in contact with earth.
Circuits in hazardous and wet locations.
Circuits exposed to mechanical damage.
All feeders (1-1/4" diameter and larger).
All motor circuits.
Use electrical metallic tubing, EMT, for:
a.
Branch circuits (conduit 1" diameter and smaller) in dry locations.
b.
Auxiliary systems and controls (low voltage systems such as fire alarm,
intercom, sound systems, etc).
c.
Feeders run overhead in dry locations.
d.
Branch circuits in concrete slab.
Use type EB conduit for exterior concrete encased application where shown.
B.
Size conduit per NEC. Minimum size 3/4" diameter. NO EXCEPTIONS.
C.
Run conduit concealed where possible. Run concealed conduit above furred ceiling in an orderly
manner. Multiple conduits grouped and run parallel.
D.
In concrete slab: Install conduits in center of concrete slabs and tie to reinforcing steel with tie
wires. Do not install conduit larger than 1" in concrete slabs unless approved by Engineer. Install
with minimum of 2" between parallel runs. Do not cross conduits in slab unless necessary, then
CONDUCTORS
260533-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
only one conduit crossover in 12" space.
E.
Exposed Conduit: Use only where specifically shown or approved. Run perpendicular to building
walls and partitions and tight against structure. Conceal vertical portion of conduits where
possible.
F.
Paint underground metal conduit with 2 coats of asphaltum or bituminous. Make underground
conduit fittings watertight using Teflon tape. Do not use split couplings and similar fittings
underground and exposed to moisture. Run underground conduits minimum 24" below grade. Do
not run conduit in slag fill.
G.
Paint conduit fittings and threads exposed to moisture with Rustoleum silver paint after
installation.
H.
Furnish offsets required to meet field conditions. Make bends in conduit in accordance with the
National Electrical Code, except make minimum radius of 6 times conduit diameter or 6"
whichever is greater. Bend IMC conduit without deforming.
I.
Where conduit crosses expansion joints, install expansion type fittings OZ type EX with bonding
jumper or approved equal.
J.
Make connections to equipment away from wall with conduit extensions exposed from ceiling to
floor, anchored with floor flange and/or angle frame as required. Make connections to equipment
with flexible conduit from tee condulet in conduit riser.
K.
Vibrating equipment and equipment requiring adjustment, i.e.: motors, transformers, etc: make
final connections with flexible conduit.
L.
Isolate conduit connections to equipment on roof from roof penetration of conduit with short
section of flexible conduit between roof penetration and equipment.
M.
Use liquidtight flexible conduit where exposed to moisture, oil, etc.
N.
Install conduit to avoid hot water pipes. Maintain 9" clearance of such pipes, unless closer
crossings are unavoidable. Maintain minimum 1" clearance from covering of pipe crossed.
O.
Support conduit per NEC. Support individual conduits with galvanized hangers and rods as
follows:
1" diameter and smaller ............................................................................................... ¼” dia. rod
1-¼” to 3" diameter ................................................................................................... 3/8” dia. rod
Larger than 3" diameter ............................................................................................... ½” dia. rod
P.
Individual conduit hangers - Minnerallac, or approved equal. Support EMT near each joint.
Support for multiple conduit runs consist of Uni-strut channel as required with 1/2" diameter
galvanized bolts or rods anchored to structure. Provide "U" bolt clamps for each conduit on
hangers. Support vertical riser conduits with galvanized bolted clamps at each floor. Do not
support conduit to ceiling support system.
Q.
Terminate conduits entering sheet metal boxes with double locknuts and bushings. Terminate
conduit exposed to moisture with watertight hubs.
R.
Install appropriate seal-off where conduits exit hazardous areas, areas of temperature differential
etc.
S.
Where ground conductor installed in conduits 1-1/4" and larger provide grounding bushings, and
CONDUCTORS
260533-3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
bond full size ground wire to bushings and from bushing to box or cabinet. Bond with self-tapping
screw and appropriate lug. Where ground wires are run in smaller conduits, bond to outlet and
junction boxes with self-tapping screw lug. Provide other conduits with non-grounding bushings
as described under another article. Provide all service entrance metallic raceways with grounding
bushing and bond to ground bus; bond sized per N.E.C.
T.
Conduit work in hazardous areas, or areas with large temperature differential: Use rigid steel or
IMC conduit with sealing fittings, poured with hardening compound after conductors are pulledin. Seals installed per NEC. Conduit seals Crouse-Hinds type EYS or approved equal.
U.
Sleeves:
1.
Provide sleeves for raceways penetrating floor and structural members. Sleeves consist of
Electrical Metallic Tubing set in forms. (Exception: Use Schedule 40 PVC for individual
ground conductors).
2.
Size sleeves to allow 1/2" clearance around raceway extending from bottom of floor
construction to 2" above floor, minimum sleeve size 2-1/2" diameter. After raceways are
installed, seal space between the raceway and sleeve with non-hardening, fireproof,
compound, CTC PR-855 sealant, T&B "Flame Safe" for 2 hour fire rating or approved
equal.
END OF SECTION 260533
CONDUCTORS
260533-4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 262200 - TRANSFORMERS DRY TYPE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE:
A.
Dry type transformers.
B.
Provide shop drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
SERVICE AND RATINGS:
A.
Transformers ventilated, for indoor service unless shown exterior, single or three phase as shown,
with KVA rating shown. Transformers shall be NEMA TP-1-1996 ‘Energy Star” compliant
energy efficient transformers.
B.
Voltage for 3 phase units 480V to 120/208V, three phase, four wire. Voltage of single phase units
480V to 120/240V, single phase, three wire. All units equipped with 2-2-1/2% FCBN and 2-21/2% FCAN taps. Special voltage transformation as shown.
INSULATION:
A.
2.3
Class-220 insulation, 80 degree C rise above 40 degree C ambient unless shown otherwise.
SOUND RATING:
A.
Maximum design sound level:
KVA
0-9.0
10-50
51 - 150
167 - 300
301 - 500
B.
2.4
DESIGN SOUND LEVEL
40 db
45 db
50 db
55 db
60 db
Sound levels determined per NEMA and ASA Standards. Mount core and coils on vibration
isolator pads.
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
G.E., Cutler Hammer, Square "D", Siemens.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
MOUNTING:
A.
Transformers are to be floor mounted.
B.
Use extreme care to eliminate noise and vibration. Suspended units; install in each rod,
Amber/Booth type PBSR or Consolidated Kinetics type SRH vibration isolator size as directed.
TRANSFORMERS DRY TYPE
262200-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
Floor mounted units smaller than 112.5 KVA: Mount on "Shear-flex pads, size as directed. 112.5
kVA and larger use spring isolators. Use seal-tight flexible conduit for final connections to
transformers.
D.
Shop drawings for each transformer to show physical size, conduit and cable space, connection
diagrams, specified requirements, impedance, and maximum current inrush at rated voltage.
E.
Unless labeled otherwise, transformer ventilation openings should be located at least 0' - 6" away
from walls or other obstructions to allow free circulation of air through and around each unit.
F.
Shop drawings for each transformer to show physical size, conduit and cable space, connection
diagrams, specified requirements, impedance, and maximum current inrush at rated voltage.
END OF SECTION 262200
TRANSFORMERS DRY TYPE
262200-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 262416 – PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
1.2
SUBMITTALS:
A.
1.3
Lighting and power panelboards and their installation.
Provide shop drawings. Include individual diagram of each panelboard showing all specified
requirements.
RELATED SECTIONS:
A.
Surge Suppressors: Refer to Division 16, Section 16315 “Surge Suppressors.”
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
GENERAL:
A.
Construct panelboards in accordance with latest NEMA and UL standards.
B.
Panelboards to be same manufacturer as other distribution equipment.
C.
Panelboard assembly UL labeled, and UL labeled as Service Entrance Equipment where used for
that purpose.
D.
Panelboards to have integrated equipment fault rating equal to interrupting rating of lowest rated
overcurrent device.
E.
Panelboards shall be factory assembled.
PANEL INTERIOR:
A.
Bussing:
1.
98% conductivity copper, silver-plated at joints or equivalent plated 55% conductivity
aluminum.
2.
Bus assembly designed for a maximum temperature rise of 55 degree C above 40 degree
C ambient temperature when carrying rated current.
3.
Minimum thickness of bus bars - 3/32".
4.
Bussing braced to withstand a fault current equal to the highest device interrupting
capacity in the panel.
5.
Neutral bus full size copper sized on same basis as phase busses and insulated from the
cabinet.
6.
B.
Arrange bus bar connections so that adjacent vertical circuit protective devices are
consecutively connected to phases A, B, and C throughout panel. Provide full capacity
ground bus in each panel cabinet, bolted to cabinet.
Cable terminations:
PANELBOARDS
262416-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
C.
D.
E.
1.
Include neutral and ground connections as shown.
2.
Make with separate, individual heavy casting aluminum, AL/CU rated lugs, Thomas &
Betts, Ilsco, Blackburn or approved equivalent.
3.
Use 2 bolt tongue or equivalent connection to bus for #1/0 or larger cables.
4.
Securely bolt lugs to bus with bolts, nuts and lock washers.
5.
Provide double lugs on main bus where shown.
6.
Feed-through lugs (one set of lugs on each end of main vertical bus) is not acceptable
unless approved Engineer.
Circuit breakers:
1.
Molded case, thermal-magnetic, quick-make, quick-break, trip free on faults, thermalinverse time delay element and magnetic instantaneous trip coil in each ungrounded
phase conductor, or approved equivalent solid state trip unit.
2.
Engrave breaker ampere rating on handle or trip unit.
3.
Furnish multi-pole breakers with internal common trip.
4.
Ground fault breakers class "A" type to trip on fault currents of 4-6 ma.
5.
Main circuit breakers UL rated for service entrance use.
6.
Switch "SWD" rated where required by NEC.
Surge Protection Device / Transient Voltage Surge Suppression:
1.
Panelboard shall be provided by UL 1449 listed and CSA 22.2 certified transient voltage
surge suppressor where shown. The panelboard SPD/TVSS shall be tested and suitable
for ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Cat. C1 (6kV, 3kA) environments.
2.
Suppressor shall be mounted immediately outside of panelboard to provide shortest cable
run for bus connection. See panelboard schedule for panelboard with TVSS.
3.
All monitoring diagnostics features such as indicator lights, trouble alarms and surge
counter shall be visible from the front of the surge suppressors panel.
Panelboards classified by type over-current protection as follows:
1.
BQL
Bolted quick-lag circuit breaker distribution, 0-100 ampere branches,
with minimum interrupting rating as shown on drawings. Equivalent to
Square "D", NQOD, Siemens NLAB, Cutler-Hammer BB, G.E. NLAB.
2.
BEF
Heavy duty circuit breaker distribution, 0-100 ampere branches with
minimum interrupting rating as shown on drawiongs. Equivalent to
Square "D", NEHB, Siemens NHB, Cutler-Hammer WEHB, G.E.
NHB.
3.
CCB
Heavy duty convertible circuit breaker distribution, 0-800 ampere
branches with minimum interrupting rating as shown on drawings.
PANELBOARDS
262416-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
Equivalent to Square "D", I-Line, Siemens CDP-6, Cutler-Hammer
CDP, G.E. type CCB.
F.
2.3
2.4
All space in panelboards usable. Panelboard space provided with necessary bus bars, fittings and
required hardware, ready for connections of the future installation of overcurrent devices.
CABINETS:
A.
Code thickness, hot dip galvanized steel or painted with trim and door. Hardware: combination
latch and cylinder lock, all keyed the same. Provide celluloid or plastic covered directory card
holder on the inside of door. Trim, door and exposed interior shall be finished with factory prime
and smooth finish coat of the color selected by Engineer. Reinforce cabinets as necessary for
service and short circuit rating intended.
B.
Flush or surface as indicated of sufficient size to allow minimum 3" gutter space each side of
panel and eight inches (8") at top and bottom, minimum 20" wide. Provide adjustable trim clamp,
semi-flush hinges and inside rabbet.
C.
Provide panels with hinged trim construction.
MANUFACTURERS:
A.
Panelboards manufactured by Siemens, Square D, General Electric, or Cutler-Hammer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
INSTALLATION:
A.
Mount panelboards securely to building structure with 3/8" minimum diameter galvanized bolts
and inserts number as required for size of panel, but not less than 4. Mount panelboards with
centerline 4'-6" approximately above finished floor and 78” maximum height to top mounted
breaker handle in the “on” position. Where panels of different heights are mounted adjacent,
install top of panel trim at same height above floor. Close all unused openings.
B.
Where two sets of feeder cables are required in panel gutter space, run one set in each side of
panel.
IDENTIFICATION:
A.
Permanently attach nameplates and circuit numbers to panel.
B.
Use horizontal consecutive circuit numbers for lighting and appliance panels unless shown
otherwise on panelboard schedules.
C.
Provide typewritten circuit directories describing service of each circuit in Types BQL and BEF
panels.
D.
Provide laminated plastic nameplate circuit identification for each circuit in Types CCB panels.
E.
Provide each panelboard with nameplate showing name, voltage, phase, wire, and where fed from.
END OF SECTION 262416
PANELBOARDS
262416-3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 262726 – WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
1.2
Wiring devices and plates (receptacles, switches, Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies,
and multi-outlet assemblies) and their installation.
DEFINITIONS:
A.
EMT:
B.
GFCI:
C.
Pigtail:
D.
RFI
E.
TVSS:
F.
UTP:
Electromagnetic interface
Ground-fault circuit interrupter
Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor
Radio-frequency interference
Transient voltage surge suppressor
Unshielded twisted pair
1.3
SUBMITTALS:
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Listed legends and description of materials and process used for pre-marking
wall plates
C.
Samples: One (1) for each type of device and wall plate specified in each color specified, as
requested by Architect.
D.
Field-quality-control test reports.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers’ packing
label warnings and instruction materials that include labeling conditions.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A.
Source Limitations:
Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate through
one (1) source from a single manufacturer. Insofar as they are available, obtain all wiring devices
and associated wall plates from a single manufacturer and one (1) source.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70 (latest edition).
1.5
COORDINATION:
A.
Receptacles for equipment: Match plug configurations.
1.
Cord and Plug Set:
Match equipment requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, the following:
1.
Hubbell
2.
Cooper
3.
Pass & Seymour
4.
Leviton
5.
Wiremold/Walker
2.2
DEVICES:
A.
Furnish devices as shown in Table 1. Catalog numbers establish minimum standard of quality.
Submit list of devices with catalog number proposed for review prior to ordering.
B.
Colors to be selected by the architect.
C.
Device Plates:
1.
Furnish devices with cover plates, .04" thick, type 302, stainless steel with brushed finish.
2.
Device plates in special areas to match device color.
3.
Furnish configuration of device plates required for multi-gang installations.
WIRING DEVICES
262726-1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
4.
Furnish weatherproof devices with individual gasketed aluminum or stainless steel covers
U. L. listed for wet locations “In-Use”.
2.3
GFI RECEPTACLES
A.
General Description: Straight blade, non-feed through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA
WD 6 UL 498, and UL 943, Class A, and include indicator light that is lighted when device is
tripped.
2.4
PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES
A.
Description: Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector; NEMA WD 6
configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade.
1.
Body: Nylon with screw-open cable-gripping jaws and provision for attachment external
cable grip.
2.
External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength galvanized-steel
wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for
corresponding connector.
2.5
CORD AND PLUG SETS:
A.
Description: Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of
equipment being connected.
1.
Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket, with
green-insulated grounding conductor and equipment-rating ampacity, plus a minimum of
30 percent.
2.
Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for
connection.
2.6
SNAP SWITCHES:
A.
Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B.
Switches, 120/277 volt, 20 amp.
2.7
FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS:
A.
Type: Modular dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.
B.
Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.
C.
Service Plate: Rectangular with satin finish.
D.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.
2.8
MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLIES:
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems
2.
Wiremold Company (The)
3.
Panduit
B.
Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete
matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.
C.
Raceway Material: Metal with manufacturer’s standard finish.
D.
Wire: No. 12 AWG
WIRING DEVICES
262726-2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
TABLE 1 – BASIS-OF-DESIGN WIRING DEVICES
NEMA
DEVICE
M AN U FA CT URE R
CONF.
Single Receptacle
5-20R
Hubbell
CATALOG # HEAVY
DUTY SPEC GRADE
HBL5361
CATALOG #
HOSPITAL GRADE
HBL8310
Single Receptacle
6-20R
Hubbell
HBL5461
HBL5461
Single Receptacle
14-20R
Hubbell
HBL8410
HBL8410
Single Receptacle
15-20R
Hubbell
HBL8420
HBL8420
Single Receptacle
5-30R
Hubbell
HBL9308
HBL9308
Single Receptacle
6-30R
Hubbell
Single Receptacle
14-30R
Hubbell
HBL9330
HBL9430A with 6ft.
rubber cord set
Single Receptacle
6-50R
Hubbell
HBL9367 w/9368 plug
Single Receptacle
14-50R
Hubbell
HBL9450A w/ cord set
Single Receptacle
15-50R
Hubbell
HBL8450A w/ cord set
Single Receptacle
Single Receptacle,
Portable X-ray
Duplex Receptacle
Duplex Receptacle,
Isolated Ground
Duplex Receptacle,
GFCI, Weatherproof
Duplex Receptacle,
Tamper-Proof
Duplex Receptacle, GF CI
Floor Outlet with
Equipment Connection
Floor Outlet with Duplex
Receptacle
Floor Outlet Double
Duplex Receptacle
Wall Switch 1-Pole
L5-20R
X-Ray 60A,
250V (2P,3W)
5-20R
Hubbell
HBL2310
Hubbell
N/A
Hubbell
HBL5362
HBL9330
HBL9430A with 6ft.
rubber cord set
HBL9367 w/9368
plug
HBL9450A w/ cord
set
HBL8450A w/ cord
set
HBL2310
HBL25605 w/ 25615
plug
HBL8300H
5-20R IG
Hubbell
IG5362
IG8362SA
5-20R GF
Hubbell
GF5362 w/ WP26M
cover
HGF8300 w/ WP26M
cover
5-20R TP
Hubbell
HBL8300SG
HBL8300SG
5-20R GF
Hubbell
GF5362
HGF8300
¾” NPT
Wiremold
881/881ADP-896
881/881ADP-896
5-20R
Wiremold
5-20R
Wiremold
20A,120/277V
Hubbell
881/881ADP-895/
HBL5362
880MP-827-(2)828R/
HBL5362
CS1221
881/881ADP-895/
HBL8300H
880MP-827-(2)828R/
HBL8300H
CS1221
Wall Switch 2-Pole
20A,120/277V
Hubbell
CS1222
CS1222
Wall Switch 3-Way
20A,120/277V
Hubbell
CS1223
CS1223
Wall Switch 4-Way
Wall Switch, SPDT
Momentary Contact,
Center OFF
Wall Switch 1-Pole, Locking Key
20A,120/277V
Hubbell
CS1224
CS1224
20A,120/277V
Hubbell
HBL1557
HBL1557
20A,120/277V
Hubbell
HBL1221L
HBL1221L
W all S witc h 1- P ole , Pil ot
20A,120/277V
Hubbell
HBL1221PL
HBL1221PL
Wall Switch 1-Pole Lighted Handle
20A,120/277V
Hubbell
HBL1221ILC
HBL1221ILC
WIRING DEVICES
262726-3
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1, including the mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise noted.
B.
Coordination with Other Trades:
1.
Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall finish materials over
device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of the
boxes.
2.
Keep outlet boxes free of plaster drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete dust, paint, and other
material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables.
3.
Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is
toweled flush with the face of the wall.
4.
Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting is complete.
C.
Conductors:
1.
Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or terminated on devices.
2.
Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or
picking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3.
The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300
without pigtails.
4.
Existing Conductors:
a.
Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b.
Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c.
Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large enough.
D.
Device Installation:
1.
Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show signs that they were
installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2.
Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors.
3.
Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until last possible moment.
4.
Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.
5.
When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly
clockwise, 2/3 to 3/4 of the way around terminal screw.
6.
Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer.
7.
When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-amp circuits, splice No. 12 AWG
pigtails for device connections.
8.
Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
9.
When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting
screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
10. Devices shall be installed secure, tight, and flush to the wall surface. Install outlet box extension rings or
spacers to bring device flush to surface.
E.
Receptacle Orientation:
1.
Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles up, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the
right.
2.
Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin at the top.
F.
Device Plates: do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and re-mount outlet boxes
when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
G.
Arrangement of Devices: unless otherwise indicated, mount flush with long dimension vertical and with
grounding terminals of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multi-gang wall plates.
H.
Adjust location of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Division 16 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use hot,
stamped or engraved machine printing with filled lettering on face of plate, and durable
wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes.
2.
Engraving shall be 1/4" high letters.
3.
Color of letter fill corresponding to branch of electrical system:
WIRING DEVICES
262726-4
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
3.3
a.
Black for Normal
b.
Red for Essential/Emergency
c.
Blue for UPS
4.
Engrave all device plates for receptacles dedicated for utilization by specific equipment
with name of equipment served (“X-ray”, “Bed”, Copier”, etc.)
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1.
In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.
2.
Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
3.
Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B.
Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1.
Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2.
Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not acceptable.
3.
Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable.
4.
GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5.
Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6.
The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new
ones, and retest as specified above.
7.
Test straight blade hospital-grade convenience outlets for the retention force of the
grounding blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall be not less than 4 oz.
END OF SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
262726-5
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 262813 - FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes: Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches,
panelboards, and switchboards.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Operation and maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
B.
Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
FUSES
Cooper Bussmann, Inc.
Edison Fuse, Inc.
Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.
Littelfuse, Inc.
262813 - 1
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FUSE APPLICATIONS
A.
Service Entrance: Class L, time delay.
B.
Feeders: Class J, time delay.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Install fuses in fusible devices.
removing fuse.
Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside
door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block and holder.
END OF SECTION 262813
FUSES
262813 - 2
East Pinson Valley Recreation Center
SECTION 262816 - DISCONNECTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
A.
Safety switches and disconnects and separately mounted circuit breakers.
B.
Provide shop drawing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
DISCONNECT SWITCHES:
A.
Heavy duty rated 250 or 600 volts as required; quick-make, quick-break operation; horsepower
rated. If switch is not available with proper horsepower rating, classify switch as isolating switch
only and provide nameplate reading "DO NOT OPEN UNDER LOAD". Operating handle
interlocked with switch door to prevent opening door with switch closed. Provide mechanical
over-ride for authorized personnel to open switch door without operating switch handle.
B.
Fusible or non-fusible as shown. Furnish Bussman "Fuse-Tron" fuses for each fusible position,
size as shown. Furnish 3 spare fuses for each size.
C.
Furnish with provisions for locking with padlock. Enclosures for switches NEMA 1, general
purpose, NEMA 3R, raintight, or special enclosure, as shown.
D.
Standard product of Siemens, Square "D", General Electric, or Cutler Hammer.
SEPARATELY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKERS:
A.
Furnish and install separately mounted circuit breakers for overcurrent protection of feeders and
branch circuits where shown on drawings.
B.
Circuit breakers: Thermal-magnetic, molded case type, rated 600 volts, with interrupting rating of
as shown on drawings at 240 volts and 480 volts.
C.
Individual circuit breakers shall be mounted in NEMA 1, general purpose surface or flush
enclosures as shown.
D.
Circuit breakers shall be the standard product of G.E., Siemens, Square "D" or Cutler Hammer.
E.
Lock-able switch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A.
Secure disconnect switches to building or equipment surface as shown. If location shown is not
suitable for installing, provide Unistrut P-1000 rack mounted as directed to secure switch.
B.
Disconnects shall be located to be accessible and within 5 feet or closer to equipment served.
C.
Provide engraved nameplates identifying equipment served, fuse or breaker size. Refer to
Specification Section 16014.
END OF SECTION 16170
DISCONNECTS
262816-1